sra4-umn 6-13ghz user manual ok

User ManualSRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)SDH Split Radio

UMN

911-381/02C0000Issue 7, March 2006

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY – FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY


Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10I-20126 Milano

Issued by Customer Documentation DepartmentS.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158I-20060 Cassina de’ Pecchi MI

DISCLAIMER

Siemens may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights relevant to the subject matters present in this document.

If not explicitly defined by a license agreement written by Siemens, the ownership of this document does not give any use license for the above mentioned patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual properties.

For your convenience, Siemens may make this document available.The entire risk deriving from the use, or the results of the use, of this document are at user’s charge. The information contained in this document is subjected to changes without notice. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed previously in a written contract.

Siemens gives no assurance relevant to the accuracy of the results or of the output deriving from such information.

In case of utilization of the information transferred by means of this document, we advise You to verify if the export licenses, required by the laws, have been granted or if there are not any other impediments arising from the laws in course in Italy, Germany or relevant to the export.

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



STATUS OF MANUAL


In Issue 7, March 2006, as to the previous Issue 6, January 2006:

– The SRA4 IDU-STM1 has been added;

– the 11 GHz ODU extension P/N have been updated;

– the Optical Safety has been modified.

STATUS OF MANUAL

– Current: Issue 7, March 2006

– Previous: Issue 6, January 2006

R-1SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


STATUS OF MANUAL


BLANK PAGE

R-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


INDEX


INDEX

STATUS OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R.1

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.7

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.11

1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1.1 Object of the present manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1.2 Contents of the user manual (UMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1

1.2 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21.2.1 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21.2.1.1 Optical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21.2.1.1.1 Warnings for the optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31.2.1.2 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31.2.1.3 Waste equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41.2.1.4 External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51.2.2 ESDS precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

1.3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

2 PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.1.1 RF channeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22.1.2 System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42.1.3 Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.1.4 Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.1.5 System building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.1.5.1 Indoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72.1.5.1.1 1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72.1.5.1.2 2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102.1.5.1.3 N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.112.1.5.2 Outdoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.132.1.5.2.1 AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.132.1.5.2.2 AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152.1.6 IDU-ODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.172.1.6.1 Radio signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.172.1.6.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.172.1.6.3 ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.172.1.7 System protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182.1.7.1 1+1 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182.1.7.1.1 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.182.1.7.1.2 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192.1.7.1.3 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192.1.7.2 N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222.1.7.2.1 NE Controller behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

I-1SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


INDEX

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.242.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.242.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.242.1.8 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.312.1.9 System power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.312.1.10 Facility & services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.332.1.10.1 Equipment management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.342.1.10.1.1F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.352.1.10.1.2Q interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.352.1.11 Mechanical structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.362.1.12 Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.372.2.1 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.372.2.1.1 General Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.372.2.1.2 IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.392.2.1.3 Transmitter Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.402.2.1.4 Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.402.2.1.5 Receiver Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.412.2.1.5.1 ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.412.2.1.6 Modemodulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.412.2.1.7 Digital Service Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.422.2.1.8 Baseband Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.422.2.1.9 1+1 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.422.2.1.10 External alarms electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.432.2.1.11 System Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.432.2.1.12 Power Consumption (from 48 V battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.432.2.2 Loop-backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.442.2.3 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.452.2.4 Environmental characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.452.2.5 EMC/EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.462.2.6 Safety characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.462.2.7 RF Channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.472.2.7.1 6L GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.472.2.7.2 6U GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.482.2.7.3 7 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.492.2.7.4 8 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.522.2.7.5 10 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.552.2.7.6 11 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.562.2.7.7 13 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57

2.3 EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.582.3.1 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.592.3.2 Equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.702.3.3 Indoor assembly composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.712.3.3.1 IDU equipment as a function of the configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.742.3.3.2 Indoor assembly composition (IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.772.3.3.3 Licence fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.862.3.3.4 Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.862.3.4 Outdoor assembly composition (ODU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.872.3.4.1 ODU AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.872.3.4.1.1 7 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.872.3.4.1.2 8 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.882.3.4.1.3 10 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.892.3.4.1.4 11 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.902.3.4.1.5 13 GHz ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.91

I-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


INDEX

2.3.4.2 ODU AP/CC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.932.3.4.2.1 ODU 6 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.932.3.4.2.2 7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.942.3.4.2.3 8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.952.3.4.2.4 11 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.962.3.4.2.5 13 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.972.3.5 IDU/ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.992.3.5.1 3/10” 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.992.3.5.2 1/4” 50 ohm coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1002.3.6 ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1022.3.6.1 2+0 CC configuration connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1022.3.6.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1042.3.6.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1072.3.6.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1102.3.7 Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1132.3.7.1 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1132.3.7.2 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1152.3.7.2.1 Balanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1152.3.7.2.2 Unbalanced frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1162.3.7.3 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1182.3.7.4 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz) 2.1202.3.7.4.1 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1202.3.7.4.2 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1212.3.7.5 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (10, 11 and 13 GHz) . 2.1222.3.7.5.1 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1222.3.7.5.2 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1232.3.7.6 Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1242.3.7.6.1 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1242.3.7.6.2 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) -
ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1252.3.7.6.3 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) -

ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1262.3.7.6.4 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . 2.1272.3.7.7 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1292.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11

and 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129

3 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.1 INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.1.1 View of the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.1.2 Drilling planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33.1.2.1 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33.1.2.2 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63.1.2.3 Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83.1.2.4 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor or on wall. . . . . 3.93.1.2.5 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on floating floor . . . . . . 3.103.1.2.6 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts for floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.113.1.2.7 Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.123.1.3 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.133.1.3.1 Ground connections for the rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.133.1.4 Composition of the fixing kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153.2.1 IDU installation in the ETSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15



INDEX

3.2.2 ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153.2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153.2.2.2 ODU Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.163.2.2.3 ODU flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.163.2.3 1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.193.2.3.1 1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.193.2.4 1+1 frame installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.243.2.4.1 1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.243.2.5 Solar shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.293.2.6 Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.303.2.6.1 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.303.2.6.2 1+1 HSBY system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.313.2.6.3 2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.323.2.6.4 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.333.2.6.5 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.343.2.6.6 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.353.2.7 Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.363.2.7.1 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.363.2.7.2 1+1 system HSBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.373.2.7.3 2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.383.2.7.4 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.393.2.7.5 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.403.2.7.6 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.413.2.7.7 Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.423.2.7.8 Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.423.2.7.9 P/N and composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
3.3 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.493.3.1 2+0 CC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.493.3.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.513.3.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.543.3.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.573.3.5 N+1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60

3.4 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.613.4.1 SRA4 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.613.4.1.1 Primary supply voltage connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.613.4.1.2 Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.623.4.1.3 Base connection elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.683.4.1.3.1 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.683.4.1.3.2 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.693.4.1.3.3 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.693.4.2 SRA4 IDU-STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.733.4.2.1 Primary supply voltage connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.733.4.2.2 Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.743.4.2.3 External connection elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.793.4.2.3.1 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/77). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.793.4.2.3.2 Connection elements for 1+1 system (P/N 597-526/78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.803.4.3 ODU connections for “received field measurement”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.81

3.5 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.823.5.1 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.823.5.2 Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.833.5.3 Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.843.5.4 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.853.5.4.1 Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.863.5.4.2 Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4” coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86


911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


INDEX

3.5.5 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.873.5.6 Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.883.5.7 1/4” coaxial cable Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89
4 ACTIVATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1 PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1.1 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1.2 System E2PROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1

4.2 ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.2.1 Local checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24.2.2 IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24.2.3 Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.44.2.4 Checks on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.1 List of checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.2 Control of the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.3 Configuration of IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.4 Received and Transmitted Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.5 Switching test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54.2.4.6 Background BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64.2.4.7 Final checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64.2.4.8 Restore of the operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

4.3 LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.74.3.1 List and use of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

4.4 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84.4.1 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84.4.2 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8

5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.1 TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.1.1 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.1.2 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35.1.2.1 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35.1.2.2 IDU-ODU cable replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35.1.2.3 IDU unit replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35.1.2.3.1 BB+MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35.1.2.3.2 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45.1.2.3.3 Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.55.1.2.3.4 Fans unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6

5.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75.2.1 IDU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75.2.2 ODU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75.2.2.1 AP ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75.2.2.2 AP/CC ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8

5.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105.3.1 Procedure for the IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105.3.2 Procedure for the ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10



INDEX

6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6.1 ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.1.1 General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.1.2 Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36.1.3 Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36.1.3.1 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36.1.3.2 IF unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36.1.3.2.1 FSK sub-unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46.1.3.3 Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46.1.3.4 Dual UHF VCO subunit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66.1.3.5 Microwave Duplexer filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66.1.3.6 Tx Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.66.1.3.7 ATPC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6

6.2 IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.76.2.1 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.86.2.2 Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.86.2.3 Fan unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.86.2.4 BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.86.2.4.1 BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.86.2.4.2 Modem Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106.2.4.2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106.2.4.2.2 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N

612-314/64-65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.126.2.4.2.3 Block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13

6.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15


911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS



Fig. 2.1 SRA 4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6Fig. 2.2 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8Fig. 2.3 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9Fig. 2.4 IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10Fig. 2.5 IDU in N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11Fig. 2.6 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12Fig. 2.7 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13Fig. 2.8 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14Fig. 2.9 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16Fig. 2.10 1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4 IDU and SRA4

IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20Fig. 2.11 1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . 2.21Fig. 2.12 Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23Fig. 2.13 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29Fig. 2.14 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30Fig. 2.15 Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32Fig. 2.16 SOH Bytes Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33Fig. 2.17 Equipment Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35Fig. 2.18 Loop-back 1 (Trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44Fig. 2.19 Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44Fig. 2.20 Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44Fig. 2.21 1+0 system with independent antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60Fig. 2.22 1+1 system with Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61Fig. 2.23 2+0 system with dual polarization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62Fig. 2.24 1+1 system copolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63Fig. 2.25 2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64Fig. 2.26 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65Fig. 2.27 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66Fig. 2.28 2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67Fig. 2.29 N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68Fig. 2.30 N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69Fig. 2.31 1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71Fig. 2.32 N+1 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72Fig. 2.33 2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73Fig. 2.34 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73Fig. 2.35 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79Fig. 2.36 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81Fig. 2.37 2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83Fig. 2.38 N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85Fig. 2.39 Outdoor assembly (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92Fig. 2.40 Outdoor assembly (AP/CC ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98Fig. 2.41 3/10” or 1/4” coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.101Fig. 2.42 Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODU’s for CC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102Fig. 2.43 Connection diagram between the ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.103Fig. 2.44 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . 2.104Fig. 2.45 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105Fig. 2.46 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106Fig. 2.47 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . 2.107Fig. 2.48 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108Fig. 2.49 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109




Fig. 2.50 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . 2.110Fig. 2.51 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.111Fig. 2.52 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.112Fig. 2.53 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113Fig. 2.54 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.114Fig. 2.55 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115Fig. 2.56 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116Fig. 2.57 1+1 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117Fig. 2.58 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118Fig. 2.59 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119Fig. 2.60 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120Fig. 2.61 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.121Fig. 2.62 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122Fig. 2.63 Supporting frames for 3+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123Fig. 2.64 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124Fig. 2.65 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125Fig. 2.66 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126Fig. 2.67 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127Fig. 2.68 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129Fig. 3.1 View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1Fig. 3.2 General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2Fig. 3.3 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4Fig. 3.4 Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5Fig. 3.5 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6Fig. 3.6 Fixing of the upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7Fig. 3.7 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8Fig. 3.8 Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9Fig. 3.9 Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10Fig. 3.10 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11Fig. 3.11 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12Fig. 3.12 Ground connections of the Rack ETSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13Fig. 3.13 ODU (AP) layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17Fig. 3.14 ODU (AP/CC) Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18Fig. 3.15 1+0 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20Fig. 3.16 1+0 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21Fig. 3.17 1+0 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22Fig. 3.18 1+0 frame - installed ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23Fig. 3.19 1+1 frame - Pole fixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25Fig. 3.20 1+1 frame - O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26Fig. 3.21 1+1 frame - ODU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27Fig. 3.22 1+1 frame - installed ODUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28Fig. 3.23 Solar shield installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29Fig. 3.24 Connections (1+0 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30Fig. 3.25 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31Fig. 3.26 Connections (2+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32Fig. 3.27 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33Fig. 3.28 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34Fig. 3.29 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35Fig. 3.30 Connections (1+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36Fig. 3.31 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37Fig. 3.32 Connections (2+0 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38Fig. 3.33 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39Fig. 3.34 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40Fig. 3.35 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41Fig. 3.36 Static desiccator for small system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



Fig. 3.37 Pressurization with external dehydrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42Fig. 3.38 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49Fig. 3.39 ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50Fig. 3.40 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51Fig. 3.41 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52Fig. 3.42 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53Fig. 3.43 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54Fig. 3.44 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55Fig. 3.45 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56Fig. 3.46 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57Fig. 3.47 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58Fig. 3.48 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59Fig. 3.49 Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60Fig. 3.50 Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61Fig. 3.51 Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62Fig. 3.52 155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63Fig. 3.53 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64Fig. 3.54 Alarm Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64Fig. 3.55 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66Fig. 3.56 64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67Fig. 3.57 Connection kit for 1+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70Fig. 3.58 Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71Fig. 3.59 Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72Fig. 3.60 Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73Fig. 3.61 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74Fig. 3.62 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75Fig. 3.63 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77Fig. 3.64 64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78Fig. 3.65 Connector for the measurement of received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.81Fig. 3.66 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.82Fig. 3.67 Grounding connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83Fig. 3.68 Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.84Fig. 3.69 Braided or 1/4“ coaxial cable - Typical fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85Fig. 3.70 IBraided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87Fig. 4.1 IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3Fig. 4.2 ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4Fig. 4.3 ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4Fig. 4.4 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8Fig. 4.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . 4.9Fig. 4.6 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9Fig. 4.7 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10Fig. 5.1 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1Fig. 5.2 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2Fig. 5.3 LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2Fig. 5.4 Alarm Restitution unit replacement management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5Fig. 5.5 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6Fig. 5.6 ODU Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11Fig. 6.1 Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2Fig. 6.2 MWTF simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5Fig. 6.3 IDU Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7Fig. 6.4 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10Fig. 6.5 XPIC Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12Fig. 6.6 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14Fig. 6.7 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15Fig. 6.8 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16



Fig. 6.9 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17Fig. 6.10 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18Fig. 6.11 LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20Fig. 6.12 LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21Fig. 6.13 LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22Fig. 6.14 LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


LIST OF TABLES


LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 2.1 RF 6 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2Tab. 2.2 RF 7 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2Tab. 2.3 RF 8 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3Tab. 2.4 RF 10 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3Tab. 2.5 RF 11 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3Tab. 2.6 RF 13 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3Tab. 2.7 Base System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4Tab. 2.8 BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10Tab. 2.9 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18Tab. 2.10 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19Tab. 2.11 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19Tab. 2.12 Section OverHead bytes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34Tab. 2.13 Short cable/Long cable setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39Tab. 2.14 Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40Tab. 2.15 Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40Tab. 2.16 RF transmitted spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40Tab. 2.17 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41Tab. 2.18 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41Tab. 2.19 Modulation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41Tab. 2.20 Typical Hitless switch thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42Tab. 2.21 Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with ± 10% tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43Tab. 2.22 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1° digit cod. 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47Tab. 2.23 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1° digit cod. 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47Tab. 2.24 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1° digit cod. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48Tab. 2.25 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1° digit cod. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48Tab. 2.26 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49Tab. 2.27 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50Tab. 2.28 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50Tab. 2.29 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51Tab. 2.30 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 4 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51Tab. 2.31 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . 2.52Tab. 2.32 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED

(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53Tab. 2.33 8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4

(1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53Tab. 2.34 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54Tab. 2.35 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3

(1st digit ext. P/N = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54Tab. 2.36 10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55Tab. 2.37 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main

(1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56Tab. 2.38 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1

(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56Tab. 2.39 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3

(1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57Tab. 2.40 13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)

(1° digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57Tab. 2.41 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59Tab. 2.42 SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70Tab. 2.43 System types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74



LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 2.44 Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75Tab. 2.45 Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75Tab. 2.46 Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.76Tab. 2.47 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78Tab. 2.48 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78Tab. 2.49 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78Tab. 2.50 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78Tab. 2.51 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79Tab. 2.52 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80Tab. 2.53 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80Tab. 2.54 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80Tab. 2.55 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80Tab. 2.56 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81Tab. 2.57 2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU “V(H) Pol.” and
IDU “H(V) Pol.”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82Tab. 2.58 2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU “V(H) Pol.” and

IDU “H(V) Pol.”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82Tab. 2.59 2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A for

IDU EXT.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84Tab. 2.60 2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B for IDU EXT.) 2.84Tab. 2.61 Licence key P/Ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86Tab. 2.62 Upgrading kit P/Ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86Tab. 2.63 7 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87Tab. 2.64 8 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88Tab. 2.65 10 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89Tab. 2.66 11 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90Tab. 2.67 13 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.91Tab. 2.68 6 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93Tab. 2.69 7 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.94Tab. 2.70 8 GHz - ODU Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95Tab. 2.71 11 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96Tab. 2.72 13 GHz - ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97Tab. 2.73 Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99Tab. 2.74 Intercond cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99Tab. 2.75 Andrew cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100Tab. 2.76 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113Tab. 2.77 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115Tab. 2.78 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116Tab. 2.79 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118Tab. 2.80 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119Tab. 2.81 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120Tab. 2.82 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120Tab. 2.83 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.121Tab. 2.84 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122Tab. 2.85 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122Tab. 2.86 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123Tab. 2.87 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.124Tab. 2.88 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125Tab. 2.89 1+1 Balanced supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126Tab. 2.90 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.128Tab. 2.91 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129Tab. 3.1 Rack ETSI list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3Tab. 3.2 Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14Tab. 3.3 Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14Tab. 3.4 ODU Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16


911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


LIST OF TABLES

Tab. 3.5 1+0 frame - P/N and flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19Tab. 3.6 1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24Tab. 3.7 Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43Tab. 3.8 Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43Tab. 3.9 Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44Tab. 3.10 Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44Tab. 3.11 Elliptical waveguide (31263-758): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45Tab. 3.12 Connectors and accessories (31263-779SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45Tab. 3.13 Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46Tab. 3.14 Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46Tab. 3.15 Elliptical waveguide (31263-762): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47Tab. 3.16 Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47Tab. 3.17 Elliptical waveguide (31263-766): composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48Tab. 3.18 Connectors and accessories (31263-796SR): composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48Tab. 3.19 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63Tab. 3.20 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63Tab. 3.21 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64Tab. 3.22 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65Tab. 3.23 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66Tab. 3.24 V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67Tab. 3.25 G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67Tab. 3.26 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.68Tab. 3.27 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69Tab. 3.28 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69Tab. 3.29 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74Tab. 3.30 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74Tab. 3.31 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75Tab. 3.32 LCT (RS 232) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77Tab. 3.33 V.11 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78Tab. 3.34 G.703 channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78Tab. 3.35 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/77). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.79Tab. 3.36 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-526/78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.80Tab. 3.37 ANDREW set (a). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88Tab. 3.38 INTERCOND set (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88Tab. 3.39 Andrew set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89Tab. 4.1 KEY alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3Tab. 4.2 Station accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7Tab. 5.1 List of spare parts - IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7Tab. 5.2 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7Tab. 5.3 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7Tab. 5.4 10 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.5 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.6 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.7 6 GHz (6L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.8 6 GHz (6U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.9 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.10 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8Tab. 5.11 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9Tab. 5.12 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9Tab. 6.1 Summary of the front panel LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19


LIST OF TABLES


BLANK PAGE


911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


1 - PRELIMINARY INFORMATION


1 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION

1.1 FOREWORD

1.1.1 Object of the present manualThis User Manual (UMN) gives the information necessary for the installation, thecommissioning and the ordinary maintenance of the SRA 4 - STM-1 Access SDH RadioSystem equipment in the RF band: 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz.

1.1.2 Contents of the user manual (UMN)The manual has been drawn up according to "Code of Practice" recommendations forthe writing out of instruction technical manuals, published under the support of U.E.R(European Broadcast Union).

The manual consists of the following sections:

– Section 1: PRELIMINARY INFORMATIONIt contains the rules and precautionary measures to be adopted by the users ofelectronic equipment as well as general nature information relevant to thesynchronous hierarchy.

– Section 2: PLANNING MANUALIt contains general information about the equipment, its electrical characteristicsand its use with a telecommunication network.

– Section 3: INSTALLATION MANUALAll the instructions are set down for the equipment mechanical installation,complete of the constituting parts, and of the electrical connections to the outside.

– Section 4: ACTIVATION MANUALThe presetting to be performed on the equipment, if required, are described, itsactivation and the check and recommended setting up measurements to ensurethe correct operation.

– Section 5: MAINTENANCE MANUALIt includes troubleshooting action, if required, useful to locate the faulty part usingthe signalings and alarms available on the equipment front panel. It also includesthe list of the spare parts which can be delivered with the equipment and theinstructions for the faulty part replacement.

– Section 6: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONSIt includes the description of the equipment part operation referred to the relevantblock diagrams.

1-1SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



In addition to the present User Manual (UMN) the OPERATOR MANUAL (OMN) isavailable, that contains the operational guide for use of the control software developpedfor the management, by local terminal, of the alarms and the presetting relevant to theequipment, in addition to the restitution of the analogue measurements, of theindications and configuration displayings of the radio system.
1.2 SAFETY RULES AND USE PRECAUTIONSThis paragraph contents all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followedduring operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to theequipment components.

1.2.1 Safety rulesThe equipment complies with the 1999/5/EC European specification.

The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC± 20%); then follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.

1.2.1.1 Optical safety

The EQUIPMENT contains only class 1 laser component according to IEC 60825-1.

1-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



1.2.1.1.1 Warnings for the optical safety
The optical source used into the subject equipment has been classified by themanufacturer as 1 class laser according to EN 60825-1/IEC 60825-1.

This class of laser is: "Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions ofoperation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing."

The following rules can be followed to increase the safety level:

– Do not point to the eyes a broken fiber or an incomplete one or an optical connectornot covered.

– If the optical source is not surely switched off, do not directly or for reflection stare(particularly using lenses or by means of a microscope) at a broken fiber or at anincomplete one or at an optical connector not covered.

– Handle carefully the optical fiber. A broken optical fiber can cause damages to eyesand skin.

– Check that the optical source is switched off before execute or interrupt an opticalconnection.

– Do not connect a fiber to an optical output without checking that the fiber terminalis ended.

– Do not supply the optical tributary out of the sub-rack and do not change the factorysettings and adjustments.

1.2.1.2 Electrical safety

The equipment complies with the Safety Norms CEI EN 60950-1.The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properlytrained personnel.

– Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of theconnections to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modulesprovided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all thenecessary connectors.

– The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.




1.2.1.3 Waste equipment management
The radio equipment at the end of its life can be classified as “16 02 14 equipment outof use different from the equipment listed in 16 02 09 to 16 02 13” according to thedangerous waste list determined in article 1 para. 4 of Government Recc. 91/689/EECon the dangerous waste updated in Recc. 2001/118/EC.

The equipment does not include:• Cadmium• Mercury• Asbestos• Radioactive materials• PCB• Berillium

INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY)

According to the art. 13 of the legislative decree, D.Lgs nr. 151 of the 25th of july2005. "adopting directives 2002/95/CE, 2002/96/CE e 2003/108/CE, releted on therestriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronicequipment, and on disposal of electrical and electronic waste".

The crossed-out bin symbol on equipment, means that the product, at the end of itsuseful life, must be disposed separately from the municipal waste. User should return itto the municipalities collection system or to the ratailers if you buy a new equivalentproduct.Differentiated waste of old appliances will result in recycling, treatment andenvironmental compatible disposal, which will help to prevent potential negativeconsequences on the environment and human health and consequently the reuse ofrenewable raw materialThe misdemenour of the disposal will lead to financial penalties as defined in artt. 50onwards, of the legislative decree nr. 22 of the 5th of february 1997.

1-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



1.2.1.4 External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outsideduring the equipment installation and starting up phase.During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety ruleslisted here below:

– During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rodare lifted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such anarea must be properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules.

– For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and onthe ODU, all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operatorsmust be respected, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary touse protection fences and belts.

– During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of theantenna.

If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected, some injuries to thepersonnel can be caused.




1.2.2 ESDS precautions
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially orpermanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operatingenvironment.The main ESDS devices are:

– CMOS components

– Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology

– SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components

– Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs

– MOS/FET components and arrays

– Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHzModules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:

In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear anantistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord.Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be storesin their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.

1-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006




1.3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

ADC Analog to Digital ConverterADM Add/Drop MultiplexAGC Automatic Gain ControlAIS Alarm Indication SignalANSI American National Standard InstituteAP Alternate PolarizationASIC Application Specific Integrate CircuitATDE Adaptive Time Domain EqualizerATM Asynchronous Transfer ModeATPC Automatic Transmit Power ControlAU Administrative UnitAUOH Administrative Unit OverheadAUG Administrative Unit GroupAU-PTR Administrative Unit PointerBB Base BandBCM Block Coded ModulationBER Bit Error RatioBIP Bit Interleaved ParityB-ISDN Broadband Integrated Services Digital NetworkCC Co-ChannelCCIR Comitè Consultatif International des RadiocomunicationsCCITT Comitè Consultatif International Telègraphique et TèlèphoniqueCTR Complesso Trasmettitore Ricevitore (Transceiver equipment)DAC Digital to Analog ConverterDCC Data Communications ChannelDCCR Data Communications Channel (Repeater section)DCCM Data Communications Channel.(Multiplexer section)DCN Data Communication NetworkDFM Dispersive Fade MarginDLC Digital Loop CarrierDLS Data Link ServiceDRF Dielectric Resonator FilterDRO Dielectric Resonator OscillatorDSP Digital Signal ProcessingDTE Data Terminal EquipmentDTI Double Tributary InterfaceDXC Digital cross-connectECC Embedded Control Channel





EOC Embedded Operations ChannelEOW Engineering Order WireETSI European Telecommunication Standards InstituteFAL Frame Alignment LossFDM Frequency Division MultiplexingFEBE Far End Block ErrorFEC Forward Error ControlFERF Far End Receive FailureFIR Finite Impulse Response filterHCDR High Capacity Digital RadioHDLC High-Level Data Link ControlHOVC Higher Order Virtual ContainerHPA Higher order Path AdaptionHPA High Power AmplifierHPC Higher order Path ConnectionHPT Higher order Path TerminationHUG Higher order Unit GroupIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersISC International Switching CenterISDN Integrated Services Digital NetworkISO International Organization for StandardizationITU-R International Telecom Union - RadioITU-T International Telecom Union - TransmissionLAN Local Area NetworkLCN Local Communication NetworkLO Local OscillatorLOF Loss Of FrameLOM Loss Of MultiframeLOP Loss Of PointerLOS Loss Of SignalLOVC Lower Order Virtual ContainerLPA Lower order Path AdaptionLPC Lower order Path ConnectionLPT Lower order Path TerminationLT Line TerminalLTE Line Terminal EquipmentMAN Metropolitan Area NetworkMCF Message Communication FunctionMD Mediation DeviceMF Mediation Function

1-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006




MS Multiplex SectionMSOH Multiplex Section OverheadMSP Multiplex Section ProtectionMST Multiplex Section TerminationMTS Multiplex Timing SourceMW MicrowaveNB Narrow BandNE Network ElementNEF Network Element FunctionNRZ Non Return to ZeroOH OverheadOHA Overhead AccessOL Oscillatore Locale (Local oscillator)OLC Optical Loop CarrierOLI Optical Line InterfaceOOF Out Of FramePABX Private Automatic Branch ExchangePCM Pulse Code ModulationPDH Plesiochronous Digital HierarchyPI Phisical InterfacePIOP Parallel Input Output PortPLL Phase Locked LoopPOH Path OverheadQAM Quadrature Amplitude ModulationRDI Remote Defect IndicationREI Remote Error IndicationRF Radio FrequencyRPI Radio Phisical InterfaceRPS Radio Protection SwitchingRS Regenerator SectionRSOH Regenerator Section OverheadRST Regenerator Section TerminationRT Ricevitore Trasmettitore (Transceiver)SA Section AdaptationSC-DRO Self Converting DROSCS Switching Control SignalSDH Synchronous Digital HierarchySEMF Synchronous Equipment Management FunctionSMD Surface Mounted DeviceSMN SDH Management Network





SMS SDH Management SubnetworkSOH Section OverheadSONET Synchronous Optical NetworkSPI SDH Physical InterfaceSPS Synchronus protection switchingSSPA Solid State Power AmplifierSTI Single Tributary InterfaceSTM Synchronous Transport ModuleSTM-N Synchronous Transport Module (level) NSW SwitchingTCM Trellis Code ModulationTMN Telecommunications Management NetworkTU Tributary UnitTUG Tributary Unit GroupVC Virtual ContainerVCO Voltage Controlled OscillatorWB Wide BandWES Weighted Evaluation StrategyWST Way Side Traffic

1-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


2 PLANNING

2.1 GENERAL INFORMATIONSRA 4 is a Point to Point Broadband Wireless System adopting an Indoor-Outdoorarchitecture at 6L GHz, 6U GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 11 GHz and 13 GHz with128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D band with SDH interfaces fitting recommended radiochannel arrangements listed in par. 2.1.1.

Ease and speed of link set-up, broadband availability and fiber quality, SRA 4 is the mostreliable and convenient solution for a wide range of applications such as:

– SDH and traditional ATM transport networks;

– LMDS, BWA networks;

– UMTS/GSM cellular infrastructure networks.

The radio system SRA 4 has been designed to transmit the following signals:

– SDH (STM-1)

The frame structure of the transmitted signal has the 155.520 Mbit/s bit rate with128 TCM - 4D or 64 TCM-4D modulation.

With the 128 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 28 MHz.

With the 64 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 40 MHz.

The WB ODU's are described in this manual.

The NB ODU's are described in the SRA 4 manual P/N 911-387/02C0000.

The SRA 4 is available with two types of ODU:– WB ODU (Wide Band)– NB ODU (Narrow Band)By means of the LCT the WB ODU can be frequency-shifted into a sub-band of theRF band, while the NB ODU's are tuned to a specific RF channel and cannot befrequency shifted by the LCT.

The WB ODU is supplied in two versions :– ODU AP for AP channelling only– ODU AP/CC for AP or CC channelling.

The SRA 4 is available with two types of IDU:– SRA4 IDU– SRA4 IDU-STM1



2 - PLANNING

2.1.1 RF channeling
Tab. 2.1, Tab. 2.2, Tab. 2.3, Tab. 2.4, Tab. 2.5 and Tab. 2.6 show the frequency bands(according to the RF channeling) of the radio digital system SRA 4.

Tab. 2.1 RF 6 GHz channelling

Frequency bands(MHz)

Recommendation

Co/cross-polar adjacent channel

spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

5925 - 6425(6L) ITU-R F.383-7 29.65 44.49 252.04

6430 - 7110(6U) ITU-R F.384-7 40 60 340



Recommendation


spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

7110-7750 (lower) ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 28 84 copolar 196

7110-7750 (upper) ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 28 56 copolar 168

7125-7425 ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7275) 28depending

on channels used

161

7425-7900 ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 4 28 49 copolar 2457425-7725 ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 1 28 42 copolar 154

7425-7725 ITU-R F.385-6 (F0=7575) 28depending

on channels used

161

7125-7425 Custom (Finland) 28 56 copolar 168

2-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING




Recommendation


spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

7725-8275 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 29.65 103.77 crosspolar 311.32

7900-8400 (8U)

OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4 28 70

crosspolar 266

8200-8500 ITU-R F.386-6 46.648 58.32 copolar 151.614

8200-8500 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 28 49 crosspolar 119



Recommendation


spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

10000-10680 CEPT.Rec.12-05 28 98 350



RecommendationCo/cross-polar

adjacent channel spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

10700-11700 ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 40 90

crosspolar 530

10700-11700 ITU-R F.387 Annex 1 40 130 crosspolar 530

10700-11700 ITU-R F.387 Annex 2 40 50 crosspolar 490



RecommendationCo/cross-polar

adjacent channel spacing (MHz)

Centre gap(MHz)

ShifterFreq. (MHz)

12750-13750 ITU-R F.497-6 28 70 crosspolar 266



2 - PLANNING

2.1.2 System types
There are 11 base configurations, identified by a number called “System Type”; thecontroller on the IDU configures the whole equipment according to this value.

The available base system types are listed in the following Tab. 2.7.

Note 1: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.

Note 2: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.

SRA 4 radio equipment is built up by:

1. one indoor shelf (IDU, indoor unit), providing the base band;

2. one or two outdoor equipment (ODU, outdoor unit), containing RF devices,connected with the IDU through an IF (Intermediate Frequency) cable.

3. one optional external “EOW” assembly

The configurations of the indoor shelf and the control programs of the slave cards aredifferent according to the selected system type and configuration.

Tab. 2.7 Base System Types

Type Description Channeling

1 1+0 Terminal without Multiplex Section Termination (MST) (note 1) AP2 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary

Interface)(note 1)AP

3 1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface) (note 1)

AP

4 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface) (note 2)

AP

5 1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)(note 2)

AP

6 2+0 Terminal without MST (note 1) AP or CC7 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)

(note 2)CC

8 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)(note 2)

CC

9 2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)(note 2)

CC

10 2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary Interface)(note 2)

CC

11 N+1 Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface)(note 2)

AP

The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly, which provides the EOWfunctionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual

2-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.3 Technology
System design is based on the use of the most advanced technologies and a big efforthas been made to transfer complexity from analog to digital hardware to take advantageof customised integration (ASlCs) and to improve system reliability.

The biggest and most sophisticated ASIC designed for communication systems is theheart of SRA 4 modem.

System design is based on a full digital concept. This approach takes extensiveadvantage of the most recent technological achievements leading to VLSI circuitsolutions, the most suitable for managing digital signals. In addition, this approach ensures a very high manufacturing quality, with an extremelyreliable performance.

2.1.4 Modulation typeThe SRA 4 adopts 128 TCM-4D or 64 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenatedcoding modulation.

The major benefit of this modulation format is a strongly enhanced error correctioncapability and bit error rate performance if compared with conventional QAM systems.

A very powerful data interleaving scatters the errors to reach an even, fiber-like errordistribution while maintaining a minimal system delay.

A powerful equaliser adapts the equalisation algorithm to the communication channelparameters. Blind or decision aided adaptive equalisation are run with the bestperformances at any channel condition.

64 or 128 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding, a powerful pointerprotection together with tailored interleavers, makes an excellent bearer for trafficrequiring errorless transmission media.

2.1.5 System building blocksThe engineering of the SRA 4 digital radio system is characterized by the high operatingfrequency. For this reason, in order to minimize the feeder loss an indoor/outdoor splitconfiguration has been choosen. The indoor part consists of a rack ETSI and one IDU.The IDU, with base band units and modem, is connected by means of single coaxial IFcable to a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to the antenna (see Fig. 2.1).

Two types of ODU are available: AP and AP/CC.

• The first type (AP) is available within the 7, 8, 10, 11 and 13 GHz bands for APchannelling and implements waveguide-connections (RF) towards the antennaand cable-connections (IF) towards the IDU.

• The second type (AP/CC) is available within the 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz bandsfor the AP or CC channelling, and implements for the AP configurations RFwaveguide-connections towards the antenna, and cable-connections (IF) towardsthe IDU; connections between the two ODUs are also implemented for the CCconfigurations.



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.1 SRA 4 Equipment
ODU

FLEXIBLEWAVE GUIDE

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”)

FIXING ON THE RACKOF COAXIAL CABLE

ODU SUPPORT

IDU

External EOW(OPTIONAL)

2-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1 Indoor section
Two versions of the IDU are available:

• SRA4 IDU:Main Capabilities:– Bit Rate: 1 or 2xSMT-1 – Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 FD DTI / 1+1 HSBY STI /

1+1 HSBY DTI / 2+0 STI-DTI-CC WB/ 2x(1+1) FD STI / 2x(1+1) FD DTI /2x(1+1) HSBY STI / 2x(1+1) HSBY DTI / N+1 STI

– 2 Mb/s WST– V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services – Co-Channel /X-PIC– WB and NB ODU supported

• SRA4 IDU-STM1:Main Capabilities:– Bit Rate: 1xSMT-1 – Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 2+0 STI– V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services – WB ODU supported

2.1.5.1.1 1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)

The indoor section consists of one IDU.

The IDU consists of baseband interfaces for data and management, two BB/Modemunits, a Controller unit, an Alarm Restitution Unit and a Fan unit. A single coaxial IF cableconnecting the BB/Modem unit with a very compact outdoor transceiver located close tothe antenna.

An unprotected 1+0 system consists of one assembly equipped with only oneBB/Modem unit; a 1+1/2+0 system consists of an assembly equipped with twoBB/Modem units (refer Fig. 2.2 for SRA4 IDU and Fig. 2.3 for SRA4 IDU-STM1 ).

Each BB/Modem unit is connected to the outdoor unit through a single coaxial cablewhere main signal, indoor-outdoor service data and outdoor power supply are senttogether. The indoor unit is totally independent of the RF band chosen for the outdoorunit, making the system very flexible and easy to deploy.

The SOH bytes can be used to transmit two 64 kbit/s service channels and a 2 Mbit/sWST.

The STM-1 interface can be either electrical or optical.

Fig. 2.6 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU.

Fig. 2.7 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA4 IDU-STM1.



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.2 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU)
Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST

PS

Exp. Port

CO-CHODU PWR

G703USER

CHACHB ODU ALM

CABLE ALM I O

D‘In OutU

n.

FAN

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

ALARM RESTITUTION Unit BB-MODEM “1” Unit

CONTROLLER Unit

1+0 CONFIGURATION


CONTROLLER Unit

1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION

BB-MODEM “2” Unit

2-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.3 IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

CONTROLLER Unit

1+0 CONFIGURATION


CONTROLLER Unit

1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION

BB-MODEM “2” Unit



2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.2 2x(1+1) configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.

Fig. 2.4 shows the 2x(1+1) system.

The 2x(1+1) system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.

Fig. 2.4 IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration

Tab. 2.8 BB-MODEM unit association in 2x(1+1) configurations

Configuration BB-Modem (1-1)

BB-Modem (1-2)

BB-Modem (2-1)

BB-Modem (2-2)

2x(1+1)FD CH1 “V”(“H”)-pol

CH2 “V”(“H”)-pol

CH1 “H”(“V”)-pol

CH2 “H”(“V”)-pol

2x(1+1) HotStby Main “V”(“H”)-pol

Stby “V”(“H”)-pol

Main “H”(“V”)-pol

Stby “H”(“V”)-pol

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

(1)

(2)

��

��

ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1)

CONTROLLER Unit (2)

ALARM RESTITUTION

Unit (2)

CONTROLLER Unit (1)

BB-MODEM (2-1) unit see Tab. 2.8




IDU Pol. “V”(“H”)

IDU Pol.”H”(“V”)

2-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.1.3 N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.

Fig. 2.5 shows a 2+1 and 3+1 protected system.

System 2+1 consists of two IDU subracks and of three BB/Modem units. The 3+1system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.

Fig. 2.5 IDU in N+1 configuration

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST

PS

Exp. Port

CO-CHODU PWR

G703USER

CHACHB ODU ALM

CABLE ALM I O

D‘In OutU

n.

FAN

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1) BB-MODEM “STBY” Unit

CONTROLLER Unit (2)

2+1 CONFIGURATION

ALARM RESTITUTION

Unit (2)

IDU “MAIN”

CONTROLLER Unit (1)

BB-MODEM “F1” unit


IDU “EXT”

ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1) BB-MODEM “STBY” Unit

CONTROLLER Unit (2)

3+1 CONFIGURATION

ALARM RESTITUTION

Unit (2)

CONTROLLER Unit (1)



(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

IDU “MAIN”

IDU “EXT”


��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.6 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU)
2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

WS Interface WS processing

CONTROLLERUNIT

F Interface

Q InterfaceAlarms input/output

DCC

Data Interface

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH InterfaceSwitch AA1

A2 Modulator

LED

DCC, S23

E2 EPROM Key

E2 EPROMFlash RAM

IF, FSK, DCInterface

ODU

Demodulator

ODU

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

T-RSOH L-RSOH

Switch B B1

B2

Power supply

From the second BB/MODEM unit


1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

DCC

DCC DCC

BB/MODEM UNIT

2 Mbit/s Wayside

SDH Interface

Data Interface


2-12SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.7 Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
2.1.5.2 Outdoor section

2.1.5.2.1 AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling)

Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.8.

The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit andfunction integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutionshave been adopted to reach the system objectives.

Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of asingle coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IFdiplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.

The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) tothe transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for messagecommunication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.

The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

CONTROLLERUNIT

F Interface

Q InterfaceAlarms input/output

DCC

Data Interface

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH InterfaceSwitch AA1

A2 Modulator

LED

DCC, S23

E2 EPROM Key

E2 EPROMFlash RAM


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

Switch B B1

B2

Power supply



1xSTM-1

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

DCC

DCC DCC

BB/MODEM UNIT

SDH Interface

Data Interface

1xSTM-1



2 - PLANNING

– Power supply unit:
Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarmfor failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primarylightning protection;

– IF unit:is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexeraddresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSKsubcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz,filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver(2180 MHz), is down-converter to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit housesalso the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.

– Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter,receiver and VCOs.

– Dual UHF VCO:is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on themechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.

– Filter duplexer:ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.

Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not needto be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance andtest phases.

Fig. 2.8 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling)

350 MHz

140 MHz

IF

Cable 50 ohm

Power Supply

Overvoltageprotection

IFunit

MW

TF

DIP

LEXE

R

DUAL VCO

2-14SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.5.2.2 AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling)
Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 2.9.

The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit andfunction integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutionshave been adopted to reach the system objectives.

Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of asingle coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IFdiplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.

The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) tothe transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for messagecommunication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.

With CC operations the two ODU's must be synchronized in Rx.

This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the twoODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RFfrequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180 MHz to 140 MHz).

With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master(generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives thesynchronisms from the ODU Master).

The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:

– Power supply unit:Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarmfor failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primarylightning protection;

– IF unit:is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexeraddresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSKsubcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz,filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver(2180 MHz), is down-converted to 140 MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit housesalso the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.

– Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter,receiver and VCOs.

– Dual UHF VCO:is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on themechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.

– Filter duplexer:ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.

Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not needto be open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance andtest phases.

In the 6 GHz ODU only one conversion (from RF to 140 MHz) is present.



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.9 Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling
With regard to AP operation switch 1 is closed and switches 2-3-4 are open.With regard to CC operation switches 1-2-4 on the ODU Master are closed andswitch 3 is open. On the ODU Slave, instead, switches 1 and 2 are open and 3-4closed.

350 MHz

140 MHz

IF

Cable 50 ohm

MW

TF

DIP

LEXE

R

RF DUAL VCO Tx

VCO

RxVCO

To/from otherODU

VCO2nd Rx

Conversion

DownConverter

UpConverter

2180 MHz

1690 MHz350 MHz

140 MHz

IF Unit

Power Supply

Overvoltageprotection

To/from otherODU

2-16SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.6 IDU-ODU interconnection
The IDU-ODU interconnection takes place through a single bi-directional line, carryingthe aggregate signal (Tx/Rx radio signal, IDU/ODU auxiliary service channel and ODUpower supply).

2.1.6.1 Radio signal

The IDU-ODU connection, regarding the radio signal transmission/reception, includesthe IF signals:

– 350 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Tx signal (from IDU to ODU)

– 140 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Rx signal (from ODU to IDU).

By using frequencies 350 MHz and 140 MHz it is possible to:

– optimize the length, the attenuation and the size of the connection cable IDU-ODU

– minimize the filtering functions in IDU and ODU

– minimize the interferences between the Tx and Rx sections of the ODU

– minimize the interferences between the harmonics of the IF Tx frequency and theshifter frequencies

– obtain the dynamic interval necessary to AGC circuit in IDU and ODU.

2.1.6.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel

An auxiliary channel connects IDU to ODU, carrying all the information for the correctoperation of the equipment (alarms, data channel, speech channel, ect.). The IDU-ODUservice connection takes place through two FSK-modulated sub-carriers, with 7 MHzand 10 MHz.

2.1.6.3 ODU power supply

The IDU-ODU interconnection cable is used also to carry the secondary DC voltage(-48 V) to supply the ODU. The DC voltage comes from the relevant BB+MODEM unitin the IDU.

In this unit are also present the soft-start circuits, the current limitation circuits and thealarm circuits to generate the open cable alarm and the short-circuit on the cable alarm.



2 - PLANNING

2.1.7 System protection
2.1.7.1 1+1 protection

SRA 4 implements a very flexible and effecting switching platform.

The switching system protects traffic from any possible anomalous conditions:

– HW faults

– Tributary and RF loss of signal

– CPU controller faults

The complete path from the source to the final destination can be effectively protected.SRA 4 provides the tributary protection. The same signal (Overhead and Payload) isavailable on both the tributary interfaces protecting the traffic even by possible tributaryloss of signal.

Hot Standby, Frequency Diversity with Single or Double tributary interface options allowusers to implement their own protection requirements just selecting the most suitablesystem set-up.

Fig. 2.10 shows the 1+1 configuration without the tributary protection (STI).

Fig. 2.11 shows the 1+1 configuration with the tributary protection (DTI).

2.1.7.1.1 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)

Tab. 2.9 Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)

Switching Criteria Switch Type

Los Tx

Unrevertive

Lof TxTIM TxTX PLL clockRX PLL clockRef clock

2-18SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.1.2 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)
– Type of Dem switching:• Hitless/errors free• Switching mode "Revertive / non revertive" (SW settable)

In the revertive mode the main channel (with higher priority) is always selected not onlyif it has a better quality than the secondary channel (having a lower priority) but also if ithas an equal one.

In the unrevertive mode there isn't a real main channel, so when the protection channelis on line there is no switching when the main channel becomes normal again (andviceversa).

2.1.7.1.3 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch

Tab. 2.10 Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)

ALARM PRIORITY Note

Demodulator Alarm 1 Demodulator Alarm covers the entire HW RX chain

RADIO LOF 1 LOF SDH in 1xSTM-1 caseSDH LOF (in BB) 1 LOF SDH of each STM-1 in 2xSTM-1

caseBB Card Fail 1EXCESSIVE BER 2 BER approx. in the range 10^-4 and 10^-6HIGH BER 3 BER approx. in the range 10^-7 and 10^-9LOW BER 4 BER approx. in the range 10^-11 and

10^-13

Tab. 2.11 Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch

Switching Criteria Switch Type

Mod Fail

Unrevertive

IF CableFSK_ALM _UPOdu TX ALMOdu PS AlmODU uP ALM



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.10 1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection ( with SRA4
IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1)

(*) Do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1.(**) 2xSTM1 do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1.

SwitchAA1

A2Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

SwitchB B1

B2

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH InterfaceA1

A2

Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

SwitchA

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2

2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703


Data Interface

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH Interfaceelectrical/optical

2 Mbit/s Wayside

T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

SDH Interface

Data Interface

electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1


SDH Interface

SwitchB B1

B2

(*)

(**)

(*)

(**)

2-20SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.11 1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4 IDU
only)

Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH Interface Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOHSDH Interface

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2

2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703


2 Mbit/s Wayside

T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1


Data Interface

SDH Interface

Data Interface


electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

SwitchAA1

A2

SwitchB B1

B2

A1

A2

SwitchA

SwitchB B1

B2



2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2 N+1 protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
Two IDUs (MAIN and EXT) are required and they are interconnected with two differentcables: E-link cable between the two controller cards and B-link cable between theupper BB-modem boards (physical board 1) of the two IDUs.

2+1 system configuration is equal to 3+1 system configuration, with the exception of thefourth BB-modem card (physical card 2 of IDU EXT), which is not equipped in 2+1system type.

BB-modem cards 1, 2 and 3 (corresponding respectively to physical card 2 of IDU 1,card 1 of IDU 2 and card 2 of IDU 2) support tributary signals and radio protectedchannel 1, 2 and 3 respectively. BB-modem card S (corresponding to card 1 of IDU 1)supports radio stand-by channel (protecting channel); "occasional" tributary signals(signals to be transmitted on the protecting channel when no protection requests arepresent) are not foreseen.

Fig. 2.13 and Fig. 2.14 show a block diagram relevant to the Tx section and Rx sectionrespectively.

"Expansion" IDU controller card is mainly used for switching management purposes (RScontroller functionality): it manages the radio alarms and the card fail alarms receivedfrom the NE controller; it exchanges messages (via SCS channels) with the peer RSController housed in the remote station and configures all the switches according to theswitching priorities and configurations received from the NE controller (userconfigurations).

"Expansion" IDU alarm restitution unit is not used.

Physical channels used inside the NE to manage switching functionality in 3+1 systemtype are depicted in Fig. 2.12. The same channels are used in 2+1 system type, with thedifference that BB-modem 3 is not equipped (corresponding channels are not supportedand corresponding alarms are not managed).

The protection channel may be used to protect, at the same time, different protectedchannels in the two directions (for example, channel 1 from the local station to theremote one and channel 3 from the remote station to the local one).

Local RS Controller sends switching requirements to the remote one according to localalarms of the receiving sections, then the remote RS Controller can decide to use theprotecting channel to transmit the requested tributary signal(s) according to the receivedrequirements or not to use it according to its local alarms (more explanations are givenin the following).

The switching is of hitless type.

2-22SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.12 Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type
2.1.7.2.1 NE Controller behaviour

The "main" IDU controller is the NE controller. It manages all the NE configurations andtransmits the alarms to the EMS (Element Manager System). A specific behaviour isrequired in double IDU configurations as detailed in this paragraph.

When a configuration change is required from LCT/EMS, it checks if the "expansion"IDU is involved:

– if it is not involved, it behaves like a NE controller of a single IDU based systemtype;

– if the "expansion" IDU is involved, it accepts the configuration only if the"expansion" controller accepts the configuration too.

Accepted configurations are saved both in controller's non volatile memory and intoConfiguration Memory key.

NE Controller also verifies that switching configurations (priorities, forcing, and so on)can be accepted.

“Mai

n” ID

U

“Exp

ansi

on”

IDU

RS controller

Controller BB-modem “S”

BB-modem “1”

BB-modem “2”

BB-modem “3”

CAF interrupt SPI

E-link

SCS 2 SCS 1

B-link

SCS 1

alarms and commands

alarms and commands

alarms and commands

alarms and commands

I 2Cbus

I 2Cbus



2 - PLANNING

2.1.7.2.2 BB Card Equipping and Configuration
It is possible to have different tributary interfaces (electrical and optical ones) for thedifferent BB-modem cards equipping a NE.

All the BB-modem cards must be configured with the same tributary capacity (STM-1 or2xSTM-1) and with the same modulation format.

2.1.7.2.3 Auxiliary Channels

Every BB-modem card supporting a protected channel can support the followingAuxiliary (also known as Service) Channels:

– one 2 Mb/s way-side channel;

– one 64 kbit/s user channel, with selectable interface (G.703 or V.11).

2.1.7.2.4 RS Controller and Protection Switching

RS Controller is the main functionality performed by the "expansion" controller in N+1system types; it has to manage all the switching criteria, according to configurationsreceived from NE controller, local alarms and messages exchanged with the remotestation using SCS channels (for redundancy two 64 kbit/s channels are used, theyoccupy S23 RSOH byte in STM1#1 of Channels 1 and 2).

Switching requests are sent to the remote RS Controller according to the estimatedquality of every single received radio channel and taking into account all theconfigurations (received RF signal quality forcing, etc., as explained in the following) andalso software detected alarms (such as card fails), which are passed from the NEcontroller to the RS Controller via E-link.

The decision for switching is always taken by the receiving side and also the forcingconditions in a specific network element are referred to the received channels. Thetransmitter side shall only actuate the requests of the remote station (and acknowledgethe execution of the request).

CAF: channel quality, local alarms and commands

CAF (Control and Alarm Frame) is a communication channel that goes through all theBB-Modem cards (via back panel inside the same IDU and via B-Link between the twoIDUs). This information is made available to the "expansion" controller via SPI bus. Itcarries alarms and commands related to N+1 switching functionality.

Quality (alarm state related) levels of the received RF channels, from the highest qualityto the lowest one, are:

– normal;

– early warning low (E_W_L) alarm active;

– early warning high (E_W_H) alarm active;

– high BER (H_BER) alarm active.

One byte only (F1 byte) is always available in STM-1 frame in N+1 system types,so just one 64 kbit/s user channel can be transmitted (per each BB-modem card).

2-24SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

This information is transmitted by each BB-modem card to the RS Controller using CAF.
The protecting channel (from the remote station to the local one) will be occupied by thesignal transmitted on the protected channel with the worst quality, if the protectingchannel has a better quality than the selected protected channel.

Other (local) information transmitted on the CAF are:

– out of Frame condition for each demodulated STM-1 signal (from BB to RScontroller);

– major alarm for the transmitting section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; fromBB to RS Controller);

– major alarm for the receiving section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; fromBB to RS Controller);

– alarms related to the protection channel (from BB to RS Controller);

– delay compensation between the two data streams, from radio side to tributaryside, for each hitless switch (from BB to RS Controller);

– detection of an AIS insertion from the remote station to the local station;

– commands for all the switches (from RS Controller to each BB).

Protection exclusion, protection forcing and priority

A quality level can be forced via LCT for each channel and the selected quality hashigher priority than the actual RF channel quality: in case of quality forcing, RSController replaces the actual measure with the forced quality level when selecting theradio channel to be protected and manual/test indication is activated.

Each protected channel can be configured via LCT to not occupy the protecting channel.The RS Controller ignores the actual RF quality level of that protected channel whenselecting the radio channel to be protected; manual/test indication is activated.

The protection functionality itself can be disabled (RPS Locked command): N+1 systemtype becomes a N+0 system type.

Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel.The RS Controller ignores the quality levels of all the protected channels and requiresthe remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protectingradio channel; after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one willswitch the Rx section of the selected channel on the data stream received from thestand-by channel. Manual/test indication is activated.

Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channelwhen no quality-related alarms are active for any protected channel. The RS Controllerrequests to the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on theprotecting channel, but, after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local onewill keep on using, in the receiver section, the protected channel ignoring the protectingone.

Two (or three) protected channels may activate the same quality level alarm at the sametime or at different times. The following rules apply:

– if equal quality alarms are detected at the same time, the protecting channel will berequested for the protected channel with the lowest index (the index is equal to thecorresponding logical BB-modem card index, i.e. 1, 2 and 3);



2 - PLANNING

– a protected channel occupying the protecting one won't be switched back to the
working one, if another protected channel with a lower index activates the samequality alarm later.

RPS Locked Mode

In RPS (Radio Protection Switching) Locked mode the switching functionality istemporarily disabled. All received working channels are forced in normal state and norequests are sent to the remote RS Controller to require the transmission of a selectedprotected channel on the protecting channel.

RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode and transmits a message to the remote RScontroller to make it aware of the situation in the following cases:

– command disabling the Radio Protection Switching functionality (RPS Lockedcommand);

– receiving alarm active on both the SCS channels;

– Stand-By Channel is no longer able to support the switching functionality (softwaredisconnection or any hardware alarm affecting the transmit section or the receivesection);

– Channel 2 is no longer able to support the switching functionality (softwaredisconnection or hardware fault affecting base band portion);

– B-link failure (detected via CAF).

RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode if it receives a "RPS Locked" message fromthe remote RS Controller but, in this case, it does not transmit a message to the remoteRS controller, otherwise a loop would arise (each station will keep on staying in RPSLocked mode because the remote one is in RPS Locked mode).

RS Controller Frozen Mode

If the NE Controller enters the Frozen mode, the RS controller is also controlled to enterthe Frozen mode.

When in Frozen mode, the RS Controller freezes the position of the switches in thereceiving side and does not take into account any change in the radio alarm states.Configurations affecting the "quality function" of the channels is refused.

Switching in transmission direction is still performed according to messages transmittedby the remote RS Controller.

Frozen mode is usually entered as a consequent action of a failure detection.

2-26SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Messages on SCS channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels are used at radio level to connect the two RS Controllers.

Transmitted messages can be divided into two categories: urgent and non urgent.

Urgent messages are the ones used to manage the switching: requests to transmit aspecified protected channel signal on the protecting (stand-by) radio channel andconfirmations that a protected channel is being transmitted on the protecting channel.

These messages are transmitted on both the SCS channels and are repeated 5 timesto have a higher probability that the remote RS Controller receives them. In case moreurgent messages have to be transmitted, they are interleaved to reduce delays.

Non urgent messages are cyclically and alternatively transmitted on the two channels.They are relevant to switching criteria and switching alarms of each channel, channelsoccupying the protecting channel, channel disabling (user's configuration or automaticinternal decision due to failure), SCS alarms, CAF alarm and working condition of RSController (Frozen mode, RPS Locked). If no cyclical messages are received for 200 ms,SCS alarm is activated.

Useless protection switching are avoided

It is useless occupying a radio protecting channel with severely degraded tributarysignal(s).

Switching requests are not transmitted if on the remote station:

– LOS, LOF or TIM tributary alarm is present (on the corresponding BB-modem)when tributary capacity is configured as STM-1 (both alarms are seen as an out offrame alarm from the RS Controller via the CAF signal);

– LOS, LOF or TIM alarms are present on both tributary signals (on thecorresponding BB-modem) when tributary capacity is configured as 2xSTM-1.

If LOS/LOF/TIM tributary side alarms are detected on BB-modem card i, a proper settingthe 4 most significant bits of SOH S22 byte (the same used for ATPC messages) in theSDH frame of STM-1#1 signal transmitted to the remote station is performed. Theremote RS Controller will be made aware of the condition and will not request theprotection of this channel.

Refusing a protection switching request

It might happen that a protection switching request transmitted from the local RSController could not be accomplished by the remote RS Controller for some reason(faulty condition or something else).

No message is foreseen to inform the peer RS Controller that a request has not beenaccomplished. Local RS Controller infers its request has not been accomplished if itdoesn't receive an acknowledge message from the remote RS Controller within 200 ms.



2 - PLANNING

Switching sequence examples
Let's consider a 3+1 system type in the following situation:

– no forcing configuration enabled (completely automatic switching);

– no quality alarm active on the received radio channels;

– each tributary signal obtained selecting the corresponding protected RF channel;

– protecting RF channel transporting channel 1.

In the following example, two switching sequences are analyzed, due to the activationof an "Early Warning Low" alarm on channel 3 (point A) and then of a "Early WarningHigh" alarm on channel 1 while E_W_L alarm is still active on channel 3 (point C).

a) Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 3 demodulator andpassed to local RS Controller via CAF signal.

1. Local RS Controller verifies there isn't any alarm affecting protecting channel.

2. Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (usingboth SCS channels) to transmit signal 3 also on the protecting channel.

3. Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controllerand transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the messagestating channel 3 is transmitted also on the protecting channel.

4. Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached inreceiving section switch 3, then it moves Rx switch 3 from protected channel3 side to protection side.

b) Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator andpassed to local RS Controller via CAF signal. Local RS Controller does not takeany consequent action because the same quality level alarm is active on protectedRF channel 3, and channel 3 is already occupying the protecting channel.

c) Early Warning High alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator andpassed to local RS Controller via CAF signal.

1. Local RS Controller verifies quality related level of the protecting channel isbetter than the quality level of protected channel 1. It also verifies that thequality level of the protected channel 1 is currently worse than the quality levelof the protected channel 3 (currently occupying the protecting channel).

2. Local RS Controller verifies the delay alignment in Rx switch 3 and thenmoves it back on the protected channel 3.

3. Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (usingboth SCS channels) to transmit signal 1 also on the protecting channel.

4. Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controllerand transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the messagestating channel 1 is transmitted also on the protecting channel.

5. Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached inreceiving section switch 1, then it moves Rx switch 1 from protected side toprotection side.

2-28SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.13 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section
Modulator


ODU

ODU



ODU

To Demodulator

ODU

Tx Distributor BB UNIT "1"

2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

WS Interface WS Processing

Data Interface

T-RSOH L-RSOH1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1electrical/optical

Not Used

To Demodulator

Stand-by Channel - IDU Main

2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

T-RSOH L-RSOH

2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

Channel 1 - IDU Main

Channel 2 - IDU Exp.


TxSt.by

TxCH.1

TxCH.2

TxCH.3

BB UNIT "2"

SDH Interface

Modulator


ODU

ODU

To Demodulator

Data Interface

SDH Interface


BB UNIT "1"

BB UNIT "2"

T-RSOH L-RSOH

Data Interface

SDH Interface


1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1electrical/optical

1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1electrical/optical Modulator


ODU

ODU

To Demodulator



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.14 N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section
BB UNIT "2"

Not Used

Stand-by Channel - IDU Main

Channel 1 - IDU Main

1xSTM-1 o2xSTM-1electrical/optical

2 Mbit/s Wayside

T-RSOH L-RSOH SDH Interface


Data Interface

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

From Modulator


ODU

ODU

DemodulatorT-RSOH L-RSOHSDH Interface

Rx Distributor


2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703


2 Mbit/s Wayside

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

RxSt.by

RxCH.1

RxCH.2

RxCH.3

From Modulator


ODU

ODU

Demodulator

From Modulator


ODU

ODU

Demodulator

From Modulator


ODU

ODU

Demodulator

1xSTM-1 o2xSTM-1electrical/optical T-RSOH L-RSOH SDH Interface


Data Interface

BB UNIT "1"

BB UNIT "2"

1xSTM-1 o2xSTM-1electrical/optical T-RSOH L-RSOH SDH Interface


Data Interface

BB UNIT "1"

2-30SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.8 System maintenance
A wide range of pole mountings allows an easy ODU installation to cover any possibleoutdoor installation condition. Several mounting structures, holding one or more ODUs,are available for integrated or separated ODU – Antenna connections.

A Back-up Memory Key, plugged on the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit in theIDU, contains all the configuration data. Once configured, the system writes all theset-up parameters on the Back-up Memory Key.

SRA 4 has been designed to simplify as much as possible all the system-relatedoperations, from installation to supervision, from upgrading to replacement of the units.

2.1.9 System power supplyThe system, when 1+0/1+1/2+0 configured, consists of one IDU assembly plus one ortwo ODUs; while when 2+1/3+1 configured, it consists of two IDU assemblies and threeor four ODUs.

Each IDU assembly can be powered from any BB/Modem unit or from both through abattery voltage (-48V±20%) delivered by the station.

Protection to power inputting from the station is afforded through the two BB/Modemunits in an IDU assembly implemented by connecting the Vmain to the PWR socketpresent on BB/Modem 1 and the Vreserve (when required) to the PWR socket presenton BB/ Modem 2 (the position of the BB/Modem units inside the IDU assembly is shownin Fig. 2.2).

When the Vreserve is not present, the BB/Modem units must be contemporarilypowered from the same power source through two separate cables thereby allowing tocarry out maintenance works on one of the two BB/Modem units without compromisingsystem operation (typical for 1+1 equipment).

The distribution pattern of the auxiliary power supply within the BB Modem units and IDUassembly is illustrated in Fig. 2.15.

The Relay Block (RL) is activated through the manual command (PW1/2__SW1/2o)situated on the Alarms Restitution unit thereby allowing to distribute the power deliveredby the station to other units.

Should the polarity at the input pins not be compatible, a circuit present on the citedblock will invalidate the manual command thereby not energizing the relay.

After having successfully surpassed the Relay Block, the -48V is decoupled throughthe diodes in order to parallel-power the two BB/Modem units and relative ODU's.

Each BB/Modem unit generates a filtered -48V (-48F) which serves to power theController unit and the Alarms unit: the latter will in turn power the Fan unit. With regardto power supply protection, the -48F are OR'ed on the Back-panel.

A Fan management circuit is fitted on the Alarms Restitution unit. The circuit is poweredby a subsidiary source outputting from the BB/Modem units (3v3BB) that are OR'ed onthe Back-panel, and by a power supply (3,3V) generated by the Controller unit(SPI_ALIM). The latter power supply keeps the circuit live for the management of theFan circuit should the 3v3BB source fail.



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.15 Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly)
CO

NT

RO

LLE

Rto

OD

Uca

ble

+VM

AIN

-VM

AIN

-48

with

IF

MO

DE

M 1

cabl

eco

ntro

l+

inse

rt IF

C-I

F

OD

Ufil

ter

FO

DC

/DC

terz

iary

p.s

.

3V3B

B.o

+V

F.o

BA

SE

BA

ND

1

-VO

DU

.o

-VO

DU

.i

+V

BA

T

-VB

AT

.o

-VB

AT

.i

PW

_SW

1/2.

iR

L

ALM

BA

T.o

batte

ry s

ens.

SB

PW

R

-48V

Inpu

t

ALA

RM

RE

ST

ITU

TIO

N

SP

I_A

LIM

PW

1_S

W1/

2.o

3V3B

B.i

+V

F.i

FAN

RL

SB

PW

2_S

W1/

2.o

SP

I_A

LIM

.i

-VF

.i

+V

FA

N.o

-VF

AN

.o

+V

FA

N.i

-VF

AN

.i

FI

-VF

.o-4

8F

MO

DE

M 2

DC

/DC

FI

3V3B

B.o

+V

F.o

-VF

.o-4

8F

-VO

DU

.o

-VO

DU

.i

+V

BA

T

-VB

AT

.o

-VB

AT

.i

PW

_SW

1/2.

i

ALM

BA

T.o

PW

R

to O

DU

cabl

e-4

8 w

ith IF

cabl

eco

ntro

l+

inse

rt IF

C-I

F

OD

Ufil

ter

BA

SE

BA

ND

2ba

ttery

sen

s.

-48V

Inpu

t

terz

iary

p.s

.

BB M

odem

1

BB M

odem

2

2-32SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.1.10 Facility & services
The SDH signal contains several standardized overhead bytes for operation,maintenance, communication and performance monitoring functions.

The SOH bytes are divided into two separate areas: the rows 1 to 3 (27 bytes) areaccessed and processed within the Regenerator Section (RS) and are definedRegenerator Section OverHead (RSOH), while the 45 bytes included in the rows 5 to 9of the SOH pattern are called Multiplex Section OverHead (MSOH) bytes and areavailable for equipment terminating a Multiplex Section (MS).

SRA 4 allows the access to rows 1 to 3 as it is used only as Regenerator Section (RST).

The functions of the various bytes in SOH are summarised in Fig. 2.16 and Tab. 2.12(according to ETSI/TM4, ITU-T/G. 708-Study Group 13 and ITU-R Study Group 9),based on the present proposal for the allocation of 6 "media-specific" bytes: see rows 2and 3 (S22, S23, S25, S32, S33 and S35) of the RSOH (Regeneration Section OverHead)area.

Fig. 2.16 SOH Bytes Management

RSOH

MSOH

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

A1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

A1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

A1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

A2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

A2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

A2

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

J0

a aa a

a aa a

X

a aa a

a aa a

X

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

B1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

E1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

F1

a aa a

a aa a

X

a aa a

a aa a

X

a aa a

a aa a

X

a aa a

a aa a

X

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

D1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D2

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

B2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

B2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

B2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

K1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

K2

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

D4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

D7

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

D10

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

S1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D5

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D8

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

D11

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D6

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

D9

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

D12

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Z1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

Z1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Z2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

Z2

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

M1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

E2

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




POINTER AU

a aa a

a aa a

1

a aa a

a aa a

2

a aa a

a aa a

3

a aa a

a aa a

4

a aa a

a aa a

5

a aa a

a aa a

6

a aa a

a aa a

7

a aa a

a aa a

8

a aa a

a aa a

9

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

2

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

5

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

6

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

7

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

8

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

9

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

X








Bytes reserved for

national use (6)

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Bytes reserved for

future international

standardization (26)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







Bytes for media

specific usage (6)



2 - PLANNING


2.1.10.1 Equipment management

SRA 4 management systems carry out all the functions required to minimisingoperational costs.

LCT, the system dedicated to the local link management, connects the SRA 4 local andfar-and terminals through the F interface.

In addition NetViewer, combining Element with Network Management functions, is theRadio Network Manager for all the Siemens Radio Systems.

Security Management, Fault management, Configuration Set-up, PerformanceManagement, Metering are performed by both LCT and NetViewer, by the former on alink base, by the latter pointing to each of the Radio Systems connected to the network.

Even when the NetViewer is connected to the network, LCT can make the linkreconfiguration at any based network point.

Fig. 2.17 shows SRA 4, running TCP/IP stack.

The system can route management signals either through a pure SDH network (DCC-R)or through any TCP/IP- based DCN.

Tab. 2.12 Section OverHead bytes

Name and FunctionsByteRows 1÷3

A1, A2: frame alignment bytes 6B1: parity byte for elementary regenerator section BER

monitoring1

J0: path trace identifier 1D1 to D3: Data Comunication Channels (DCCR) 3E1: omnibus/express voice service channel, regeneration

section1

F1: 64 kbit/s data user channel 1Byte reserved for media specific use: 6S22S23

S32S25, S33, S35

Byte used for ATCPByte used for 64 kbit/s data channel or SCS signal in N+1 applicationByte used for supervisionByte used for the wayside traffic

Bytes reserved for national use:used by wayside traffic

4

Bytes reserved for future international standardization: used temporary by the wayside traffic

4

Total 27

2-34SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.17 Equipment Management Architecture
2.1.10.1.1 F interface

The Controller unit makes available outside a 38.4 kbit/s data channel (RS-232Cstandard) LCT connector to connect a local PC to configure, preset and supervise thelocal equipment.

During the normal operation of the equipment the connection to the LCT connector isnot necessary; the LCT can be used only during the commissioning and during the localmaintenance activities.

With regard to 1+0/1+1/2+0 systems consisting of only one IDU, the local operator mustconnect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLERunit.

With regard to N+1 (2+1/3+1) systems consisting of two IDU's, the local operator mustconnect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLERunit on the IDU MAIN assembly (see Fig. 2.5).

2.1.10.1.2 Q interface

The IDU makes available outside a data channel to transport the TMN information of aradio network to the supervisory center.

Channel Q can be accessed externally with the 10/100 BASE-T electrical interface(connector "Q-LAN" situated on the front panel of the controller unit).

Connector "Q-LAN", situated on the Controller unit, is used on systems 1+0/1+1/2+0consisting of an IDU assembly.

Connector "Q-LAN" of the "IDU MAIN" assembly is used on systems N+1 (2+1/3+1)consisting of two IDU assemblies.

LocalTerminalCPU

RemoteTerminalCPU

R

QF

R

Radio Side

DCN

LAN NetViewer/ENMS

SRA 4 management through TCP/IP DCN networks

TCP/IPRouting Ports

F: RS232Q: 10/100 Base-TR: SOH byte (S23)

LCT



2 - PLANNING

2.1.11 Mechanical structure
The mechanical structure of the IDU and ODU meets the ETSI standard (ETS 300119-1, 3, 4).

The plug-in IDU is installed in a 2200 mm (Height) x 600 mm (Length) x 300 mm (Depth)rack.

In the adopted solution, with only frontal access, particular efforts have been dedicatedon the shielding of the plug-in indoor unit to meet the EMC and EMI specifications.

Installation solutions: wall-installation and floor-installation in the center of the room (forin-line and back to back configurations).

2.1.12 ConfigurationsThe available configurations and the IDU and ODU compositions of SRA 4 equipmentare listed in par. 2.3 – "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

2-36SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


2.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICSIn this paragraph the main electrical characteristics, the mechanical characteristics, andthe operating environmental conditions relevant to the SRA 4 equipment are listed.

2.2.1 Electrical Characteristics

2.2.1.1 General Electrical Characteristics

– SDH frame structure STM-1

– Bit Rate 1xSTM-1 155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm

– Bit Rate 2xSTM-1 2x155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppmNote : The two STM-1 signals must be synchronous.I In the SRA4 IDU-STM1 not supported.

– STM-1 interface:• electrical ITU-T G.703• optical ITU-T G.957 S-1.1

– 6 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):• 6L: F.383-7 (5925-6425 MHz)• 6U: F.384-7 (6430-7110 MHz)

– 7 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):• F.385-6 Annex 1 (7425-7725 MHz)• F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz lower)• F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz upper)• F.385-6 Annex 4 (7425-7900 MHz)• F.385-6 (f0=7275 MHz) (7125-7425 MHz)• F.385-6 (f0=7575 MHz) (7425-7725 MHz)• Custom (Finland) (7125-7425 MHz)

– 8 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):• F.386-6 (8200-8500 MHz)• F.386-6 Annex 1 (7725-8275 MHz)• ITU-R/OIRT F.386-6 Annex 4 (7900-8400 MHz)• F.386-6 Annex 3 (8200-8500 MHz)

– 10 GHz RF frequency range (CEPT):• CEPT. Rec.12-05 (10000-10680 MHz)

– 11 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):• F.387 Recommends 1 (10700-11700 MHz)• F.387 Annex 1 (10700-11700 MHz)• F.387 Annex 2 (10700-11700 MHz)

– 13 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):• F.497-6 (12750-13750 MHz)

– Channelling:• 6L GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.1• 6U GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.2• 7 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.3• 8 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.4



2 - PLANNING

• 10 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.5• 11 GHz (64 or 128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.6• 13 GHz (128 TCM - 4D) see par. 2.2.7.7
– Shifter frequency:• 6L GHz 252 MHz• 6U GHz 340 MHz• 7 GHz 154/161/168/196/245 MHz• 8 GHz 151.614/266/311.32 MHz• 10 GHz 350 MHz• 11 GHz 490/530 MHz• 13 GHz 266 MHz

– Output connector toward the antenna:• 6L GHz R70 waveguide• 6U GHz R70 waveguide• 7 GHz R84 waveguide• 8 GHz R84 waveguide• 10 GHz R100 waveguide• 11 GHz R100 waveguide• 13 GHz R120 waveguide

– Antenna output flange:• 6L GHz UDR 70• 6U GHz UDR 70• 7 GHz UDR 84• 8 GHz UDR 84• 10 GHz UDR 100• 11 GHz UDR 100• 13 GHz UDR 120

– Modulation 64 TCM-4D/128 TCM-4D

– Tx intermediate frequency 350 MHz

– Rx intermediate frequency 140 MHz

– FSK input/output frequency 7 MHz

– FSK output/ input frequency 10 MHz

– Lightning protection according to IEC 61000-4-5

– Range of temperature with guaranteed performances -33 °C to +55 °C (outdoor unit)

-5 °C to +50 °C (indoor unit)

2-38SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.2 IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics
– Max. IDU/ODU distance:• with 3/10” 50 ohm coax. cable 190 m• with 1/4” 50 ohm coax. cable 250 m

Note: the 1/4” 50 ohm coax. cable is delivered on demand.

– Modulator output IF level +5 dBm

– ODU output IF level -16 dBm ± 2 dB

– Software setting short cable/long cable

According to the type of the cable and to the “L” lenght a setting must be set via software:“short cable” or “long cable” as explained in the Tab. 2.13.

Tab. 2.13 Short cable/Long cable setting

1/4” coax. cable Braided coax. cableshort cable long cable short cable long cable

L < 95 m ± 5 m L > 95 m ± 5 m L < 60 m ± 5 m L > 60 m ± 5 m



2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.3 Transmitter Characteristics
Note: For the Tx output power of the Hot Standby version, see the par. 2.2.1.4.

– IF frequency 350 MHz ±500 kHz

– Return losses at the ODU RF output ≥ 15 dB

– Frequency stability within the temperature range -33 to +55° ≤ ± 5 ppm

2.2.1.4 Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version)

In the HSBY system consider the following additional loss.

– Hot Standby system with balanced coupler (splitter)• Main channel ≤ 3.3 dB• Stand-by channel ≤ 3.3 dB

– Hot Standby system with unbalanced coupler• Main channel ≤ 1.5 dB• Stand-by channel ≤ 11.5 dB

Tab. 2.14 Max output power (typical value and tolerance at ODU flange)

6L/6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

+23 dBm ± 1 dB +23 dBm ± 1 dB +23 dBm ± 1 dB +21 dBm ± 1 dB +21 dBm ± 1 dB +20 dBm ± 1 dB

Tab. 2.15 Max output power (guaranteed value at ODU flange)

6L/6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

+22 dBm +22 dBm +22 dBm +20 dBm +20 dBm +19 dBm

Tab. 2.16 RF transmitted spectrum

6L 6U 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

128 TCM, 1xSTM-1

AP:– EN 300 234CC:– EN 301 127

AP:– EN 301 461CC:– EN 301 461

AP:– EN 300 234CC:– EN 301 127

AP:– EN 300 234CC:– EN 301 127

AP:– EN 300 234CC:– N.A.

AP:– EN 301 461CC:– EN 301 461

AP:– EN 300 234CC:– EN 301 127

64 TCM, 1xSTM-1 - CC:

– EN 301 461 - - - CC:– EN 301 461 -

2-40SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.5 Receiver Characteristics
– Range of RF input level within which the IF output is kept at nominal level (-16 dBm± 1 dB):– 6L GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 6U GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 7 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 8 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 10 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 11 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm– 13 GHz da -20 a -80 dBm

– IF frequency 140 MHz

– IF output impedance 50 ohm balanced

2.2.1.5.1 ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control)

– ATPC type continuous

– Max. ATPC range 15 dB ±2 dB

– Tx max. power PMIN + ATPC Range

– PRx threshold for ATPC intervention:– 128 TCM selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm– 64 TCM selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm

2.2.1.6 Modemodulator

Tab. 2.17 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 128 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C

Band 6L/6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

Threshold BER ≤ 10-6 (dBm) -70.0 -70.5 -70.0 -70.5 -70.5 -69.5Threshold BER ≤ 10-8 (dBm) -69.0 -69.5 -69.0 -69.5 -69.5 -68.5

Tab. 2.18 Rx guaranteed thresholds (dBm) for 64 TCM - 4D at ETSI point C

Band 6U GHz 11 GHz

Threshold BER ≤ 10-6 (dBm) -72 -71Threshold BER ≤ 10-8 (dBm) -71 -70

Tab. 2.19 Modulation Type

Type of modulation Information bits/symbol

128 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding 6.564 TCM - 4D + Reed Solomon with concatenated coding 5.5



2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.7 Digital Service Channels
– F1 1x64 kbit/s (byte F1)V.11 interface (or G.703 ) (*)(**)

– S23 1x64 kbit/s (byte S23)G.703 interface (or V.11) (*)

– Way Side Traffic(***) 2 Mbit/s G.703 interface(plesiochronous)

(*) If F1 is configured as V.11, S23 must be configured as G.703 or viceversa.(**) In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only.(***) Available with 2xSTM1 BB/Modem unit only.

2.2.1.8 Baseband Interfaces

– STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s)• electrical ITU-T G.703• optical ITU-T G.957 S1.1

2.2.1.9 1+1 protection

– Type of Dem switching hitless/errors free

– Switching mode settable revertive/non revertive

The feature “errors free” means that in the entire switching process no bit errorsshall occur at the STM-1 tributary output, that is:– the switching logic shall switch before any bit error incoming;– during the switching no bit errors should occur;– no pattern loss shall occur in the entire process.The switch criteria are based on S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) measurements andnot BER estimator.The Dem switch occurs when there are both the following conditions:– S/N ≤ (S/N)threshold– S/N ≤ (S/N)protection_flow + hysteresiswhere the values of S/N threshold are shown in Tab. 2.20.

Tab. 2.20 Typical Hitless switch thresholds

Modulation

EW-L Thr. EW-H Thr. EW-HH Thr.

S/N S/N S/N

in out in out in out

1xSTM-1 128 TCM 28.7 dB 29.4 dB 26.7 dB 27.5 dB 25.5 dB 26.1 dB1xSTM-1 64 TCM 25.6 dB 26.6 dB 24.0 dB 24.8 dB 21.8 dB 22.6 dB

2-42SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.1.10 External alarms electrical specifications
– Input alarm logic state:• floating --> logic 0 --> normal condition• ground --> logic 1 --> alarm condition

– Output alarm logic state:• ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition• open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition

– Output telecontrol logic state• ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition• open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition

Note: The logical state associated to the alarm condition at the input (station alarms) issoftware programmable.

2.2.1.11 System Power Supply

The power supply meets racc. ETSI EN 300-132-2:

– Nominal voltage -48 Vdc ± 20 %

2.2.1.12 Power Consumption (from 48 V battery)

Tab. 2.21 Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with ± 10% tolerance

IDU 1+0 (1xSTM1)

26 W Electrical/27 W Optical

IDU 1+0(2xSTM1)


IDU 1+1(1xSTM1)


IDU 1+1(2xSTM1)


6LGHz 6U GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHzODU 60 W 60 W 60 W 60 W 60 W 60 W 60 W



2 - PLANNING

2.2.2 Loop-backs
The following 3 loop-backs are available in the IDU on the BB+MODEM unit:

1. Loop-back 1 (Trib.) - Tributary loop on the STM-1 input/output interface

2. Lopp-back 2 (Trib. side int.) - Tributary loop inside the BB+MODEM unit (the signalbefore the MODEM section is lopped back).

3. Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) - Radio loop at the tributary section.

Fig. 2.18 Loop-back 1 (Trib.)

Fig. 2.19 Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.)

Fig. 2.20 Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.)

All the loopbacks should be set by LCT and TMN.

I/OINTERFACE

BBSECTION

MODEMSECTION

STM-1

STM-1

I/OINTERFACE

BBSECTION

MODEMSECTION

STM-1

I/OINTERFACE

BBSECTION

MODEMSECTION

2-44SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.3 Mechanical characteristics
The mechanical characteristics of the indoor equipment are in accordance with thestandards as defined by ETSI (EN 300 119-3, 4, rack and subrack respectively).

The racks are so dimensioned:

– height 2200 mm

– width 600 mm

– depth 300 mm

The IDU sub-rack has the following dimensions:

– standard shelf 2 U (ETSI and 19”)

The ODU mechanical characteristics are:

– height 365 mm

– width 280 mm

– depth 180 mm

Weight of modules

– ETSI rack 57 Kg

– Indoor Unit (fully equipped) 5 Kg

– Outdoor Unit 9 Kg

2.2.4 Environmental characteristicsThe equipment meets the environmental conditions

Indoor equipment:

– Normal conditions: Class 3.2

– Temperature limits -5 to +50°C

– Humidity limits 5% to 95%

– Maximum temperature limit Up to +55°C (without permanent damages)

Outdoor equipment:

– Normal conditions: Class 4.1

– Temperature limits -33 to +55°C

– Humidity limits 15% to 100%



2 - PLANNING

2.2.5 EMC/EMI
The equipment is compliant to EMI/EMC parameters according to the above listedstandards and to ETSI standards EN 301 489-1 e EN 301 489-4.

– Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2, criterion 1 Level 2 (± 4kV contact), level 3 (± 8kV air ),

– RF electromagnetic field immunity according to IEC 61000-4-3, criterion 1(80-2000 MHz) (3 V/m for IDU and 30 V/m for ODU)

– Electrical Fast Transient/ accord. to IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, criterion 1Burst (EFT/B) immunity (DC lines 2kV; Signal and control lines 1kV)

– Surge immunity accord. to IEC 61000-4-5, criterion 2Class 2 (Signal and control lines 0.5kV)

– Radio frequency common mode accord. to IEC 61000-4-6, Level 2 (3 Vrms)(0.15-80 MHz) criterion 1

– Conducted emission according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B

– Radiated emission according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B

N.B.:

– criterion 1: no degradation of normal performance (no errors)

– criterion 2: degradation of normal performance / loss of functionality, with autorecovery

2.2.6 Safety characteristics– Safety according to EN 60950-1

2-46SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.7 RF Channelling
In the following are listed the tables of the channeling foreseen in the available RFbands. In the tables is present the 3-digit extension P/N of the ODU, which indicates thechannel at which the ODU has been adjusted in factory. In the tables is also present theextension P/N of the duplexer, because the duplexer is the only unit in the ODU whichdepends on the frequency and for this reason is adjusted in factory according to the RFchannel.

2.2.7.1 6L GHz channelling

By the LCT the channel frequency can be set at 250 kHz step.

Tab. 2.22 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1° digit cod. 1)

Shifter = 252.040 MHz

GO (MHz)Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 5945,200 101

527-703/57

101 6197,240 151

527-703/57

1012 5974,850 102 102 6226,890 152 1023 6004,500 103 103 6256,540 153 1034 6034.150 104 104 6286,190 154 1045 6063,800 105 105 6315,840 155 1056 6093,450 106 106 6345,490 156 1067 6123,100 107 107 6375,140 157 1078 6152,750 108 108 6404,790 158 108

Tab. 2.23 6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1° digit cod. 2)

Shifter = 252.040 MHz


Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 5930,375 201

527-703/57

201 6182,415 251

527-703/57

2012 5960,025 202 202 6212,065 252 2023 5989,675 203 203 6241,715 253 2034 6019,325 204 204 6271,365 254 2045 6048,975 205 205 6301,015 255 2056 6078,625 206 206 6330,665 256 2067 6108,275 207 207 6360,315 257 2078 6137,925 208 208 6389,965 258 208



2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.2 6U GHz channelling
Tab. 2.24 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1° digit cod. 3)

Shifter = 340 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 6460 301

527-703/58

301 6800 351

527-703/58

3012 6500 302 302 6840 352 3023 6540 303 303 6880 353 3034 6580 304 304 6920 354 3045 6620 305 305 6960 355 3056 6660 306 306 7000 356 3067 6700 307 307 7040 357 30785 6740 308 308 7080 358 308

Tab. 2.25 6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1° digit cod. 4)

Shifter = 340 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 6440 401

527-703/58

401 6780 451

527-703/58

4012 6480 402 402 6820 452 4023 6520 403 403 6860 453 4034 6560 404 404 6920 454 4045 6600 405 405 6940 455 4056 6640 406 406 6980 456 4067 6680 407 407 7020 457 407

85 6720 408 408 7060 458 408

2-48SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.2.7.3 7 GHz channelling
Tab. 2.26 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1)

High=

7597

Shifter = 168 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7457 106

527-705/35

106 7625 156

527-705/35

1062 7485 107 107 7653 157 1073 7513 108 108 7681 158 1084 7541 109 109 7709 159 1095 7569 110 110 7737 160 110

Low=

7297

Shifter = 196 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7121 101

527-705/26

101 7317 151

527-705/26

1012 7149 102 102 7345 152 1023 7177 103 103 7373 153 1034 7205 104 104 7401 154 1045 7233 105 527-725/27 105 7429 155 527-705/27 105



2 - PLANNING



Shifter = 154 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7442 201

527-705/35

201 7596 251

527-705/35

2012 7470 202 202 7624 252 2023 7498 203 203 7652 253 2034 7526 204 204 7680 254 2045 7554 205 205 7708 255 205

Tab. 2.28 7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3)

(F0=7575)

Shifter = 161 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7428 321

527-705/35

321 7589 371

527-705/35

3212 7435 322 322 7596 372 3223 7442 323 323 7603 373 3234 7449 324 324 7610 374 3245 7456 352 352 7617 375 3256 7463 326 326 7624 376 3267 7470 327 327 7631 377 3278 7477 328 328 7638 378 3289 7484 329 329 7645 379 329

10 7491 330 330 7652 380 33011 7498 331 331 7659 381 33112 7505 332 332 7666 382 33213 7512 333 333 7673 383 33314 7519 334 334 7680 384 33415 7526 335 335 7687 385 33516 7533 336 336 7694 386 33617 7540 337 337 7701 387 33718 7547 338 338 7708 388 33819 7554 339 339 7715 389 33920 7561 340 340 7722 390 340

2-50SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING



(F0=7275)

Shifter = 161 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7128 301

527-705/26

301 7289 351

527-705/26

3012 7135 302 302 7296 352 3023 7142 303 303 7303 353 3034 7149 304 304 7310 354 3045 7156 305 305 7317 355 3056 7163 306 306 7324 356 3067 7170 307 307 7331 357 3078 7177 308 308 7338 358 3089 7184 309 309 7345 359 30910 7191 310 310 7352 360 31011 7198 311 311 7359 361 31112 7205 312 312 7366 362 31213 7212 313 313 7373 363 31314 7219 314 314 7380 364 31415 7226 315 315 7387 365 31516 7233 316 316 7394 366 31617 7240 317 317 7401 367 31718 7247 318 318 7408 368 31819 7254 319 319 7415 369 31920 7261 320 527-705/31 320 7422 370 527-705/31 320


Shifter = 245 MHz

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N

ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.1 7442 401

527-705/35401 7687 451

527-705/35401

2 7470 402 402 7715 452 4023 7498 403

527-705/36403 7743 453

527-705/36403

4 7526 404 404 7771 454 4045 7554 405 405 7799 455 4056 7582 406

527-705/38406 7827 456

527-705/38406

7 7610 407 407 7855 457 4078 7638 408 408 7883 458 408



2 - PLANNING

In the 8 GHz range, some channels have frequencies and shifter that are notintegral multiple values of 250 kHz (minimum resolution allowed by the ODUconfiguration software).In these cases, the ODUs are configured by means of the values reported in boldand between brackets in the following tables.Then, the parameters can be different from those defined by the ITU-R channellingbut, considering the frequency stabilty of the 8 GHz ODU, the EN-300-234reference normative is however respected.

Tab. 2.31 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext. P/N = 1)

Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)


Duplexer P/NExt. P/N

Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.

1 7747.700(7747.750) 101

527-705/62

101 8059.020(8059.000) 151

527-705/62

101

2 7777.350(7777.500) 102 102 8088.670

(8088.750) 152 102

3 7807.000(7807.000) 103 103 8118.320

(8118.250) 153 103

4 7836.650(7836.750) 104 104 8147.970

(8148.000) 154 104

5 7866.300(7866.250) 105 527-705/66 105 8177.620

(8177.500) 155 527-705/66 105

6 7895.950(7896.000) 106

527-705/67

106 8207.270(8207.250) 156

527-705/67

106

7 7925.600(7925.750) 107 107 8236.920

(8237.000) 157 107

8 7955.250(7955.250) 108 108 8266.570

8266.500) 158 108

2-52SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.32 8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED (1st digit ext. P/N = 2)

Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.

1 7732.875(7733.000) 201

527-705/62

201 8044.195(8044.250) 251

527-705/62

201

2 7762.525(7762.500) 202 202 8073.845

(8073.750) 252 202

3 7792.175(7792.250) 203 203 8103.495

(8103.500) 253 203

4 7821.825(7821.750) 204 204 8133.145

(8133.000) 254 204

5 7851.475(7851.500) 205 205 8162.795

(8162.750) 255 205

6 7881.125(7881.250) 206

527-705/67

206 8192.445(8192.500) 256

527-705/67

206

7 7910.775(7910.750) 207 207 8222.095

(8222.000) 257 207

8 7940.425(7940.500) 208 208 8251.745

8251.750) 258 208

Tab. 2.33 8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4(1st digit ext. P/N = 3)

Shifter = 266 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.1 7926 301

527-705/67

301 8192 351

527-705/67

3012 7954 302 302 8220 352 3023 7982 303 303 8248 353 3034 8010 304 304 8276 354 3045 8038 305

527-705/70305 8304 355

527-705/70305

6 8066 306 306 8332 356 3067 8094 307

527-705/71307 8360 357

527-705/71307

8 8122 308 308 8388 358 308



2 - PLANNING



Shifter = 151.614 MHz (151.500 MHz)



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.

1 8210.048(8210.000) 401

527-705/73

401 8361.662(8361.500) 451

527-705/73

401

3 8233.372(8233.500) 403 403 8384.986

(8385.000) 453 403

5 8256.696(8256.750) 405 405 8408.310

(8408.250) 455 405

7 8280.020(8280.000) 407 407 8431.634

(8431.500) 457 407

9 8303.344(8303.500) 409 409 8454.958

(8455.000) 459 409

11 8326.668(8326.750) 411 411 8478.282

(8478.250) 461 411


Shifter = 119 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.1 8293 001

527-705/73

001 8412 051

527-705/73

0012 8307 002 002 8426 052 0023 8321 003 003 8440 053 0034 8335 004 004 8454 054 0045 8349 005

527-705/74005 8468 055

527-705/74005

6 8363 006 006 8482 056 006

2-54SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Tab. 2.36 10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05

CEPT.Rec 12-05 (Shifter = 350 MHz - 1° digit cod. 1)

ext ODU=100 => TF-MIN=10008 MHz; TF_MAX=10160 MHz


GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 10028 100

527-904/92 001

10378 150

527-904/92 0012 10056 100 10406 1503 10084 100 10434 1504 10112 100 10462 1505 10140 100 10490 150



GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

GO (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU

Duplexer P/N

Ext. P/N

Dupl.

1 10168 101

527-904/92 002

10518 151

527-904/92 0022 10196 101 10546 1513 10224 101 10574 1514 10252 101 10602 1515 10280 101 10630 151



2 - PLANNING

(*) Not available for Annex 1

Tab. 2.37 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main(1st digit ext. P/N = 1)

Shifter = 530 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.1 10715 110

527-904/84

007 11245 160

527-904/84

0072 10755 110 007 11285 160 0073 10795 110 007 11325 160 0074 10835 110 007 11365 160 0075 10875 110 007 11405 160 0076 10915 110 007 11445 160 0077 10955 111

527-904/84

008 11485 161

527-904/84

0088 10995 111 008 11525 161 0089 11035 111 008 11565 161 00810 11075 111 008 11605 161 00811 11115 111 008 11645 161 00812 11155 111 008 11685 161 008

Tab. 2.38 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/Annex 1(1st digit ext. P/N = 2)

Shifter = 530 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.1 (*) 10695 210

527-904/84

009 11225 260

527-904/84

0092 10735 210 009 11265 260 0093 10775 210 009 11305 260 0094 10815 210 009 11345 260 0095 10855 210 009 11385 260 0096 10895 210 009 11425 260 0097 10935 211

527-904/84

010 11465 261

527-904/84

0108 10975 211 010 11505 261 0109 11015 211 010 11545 261 01010 11055 211 010 11585 261 01011 11095 211 010 11625 261 01012 11135 211 010 11665 261 010

2-56SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING



Note: between brackets the interleaved channelling is shown.

Tab. 2.39 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06 Recommends 3(1st digit ext. P/N = 3)

Shifter = 490 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.1 10735 310

527-904/84

011 11225 360

527-904/84

0112 10775 310 011 11265 360 0113 10815 310 011 11305 360 0114 10855 310 011 11345 360 0115 10895 310 011 11385 360 0116 10935 310 011 11425 360 0117 10975 311

527-904/84

012 11465 361

527-904/84

0128 11015 311 012 11505 361 0129 11055 311 012 11545 361 01210 11095 311 012 11585 361 01211 11135 311 012 11625 361 01212 11175 311 012 11665 361 012

Tab. 2.40 13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)(1° digit ext. P/N = 1)

Shifter = 266 MHz



Dupl.

RETURN (MHz)

Ext. P/N ODU


Dupl.

1 12765(12779) 100

527-904/74

001 13031(13045) 150

527-904/74

001

2 12793(12807) 100 001 13059

(13073) 150 001

3 12821(12835) 100 001 13087

(13101) 150 001

4 12849(12863) 100 001 13115

(13129) 150 001

5 12877(12891) 101

527-904/74

002 13143(13157) 151

527-904/74

002

6 12905(12919) 101 002 13171

(13185) 151 002

7 12933(12947) 101 002 13199

(13213) 151 002

8 12961(12975) 101 002 13227

(13241) 151 002



2 - PLANNING


2.3 EQUIPMENT COMPOSITIONThis paragraph lists and shows the "main parts" the equipment consists of.

As "main parts" are indented the units which are autonomous from a structural andfunctional point of view and are accessible and extractable from the two separatemodules the system consists of:

– indoor assembly

– outdoor assembly

The outdoor assembly is a transceiver housed in a very compact tight container,installed on the antenna or on pole.

The indoor assembly consists of an ETSI rack, equipped with one sub-rack IDU.

The two assemblies (sub-racks) are IF-level connected by single coaxial cable.

The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly (P/N 705-102/01), which provides theEOW functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual.

2-58SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.1 System configurations
For the equipment are provided the configurations listed in Tab. 2.41.

Note 1: The waveguide connection between ODU and antenna can be flexible orelliptical type.

Note 2: The coupler can be balanced or unbalanced type.

Note 3: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.

Note 4: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.

Tab. 2.41 System configurations

Configuration Denomination Ref. to Figure

1+0(Note 3)

1+0 system with independent antenna (Note 1) Fig. 2.21

1+1 HSBY (Note 3)

1+1 system with Hot Standby (Note 2) Fig. 2.22

2+0 DPor

1+1 DP(Note 3)

2+0 system with dual polarization with adjacent channels or 1+1 system with dual polarization with adjacent channels (Note 1) Fig. 2.23

1+1 FD(Note 3)

1+1 system heterofrequency copolar (with circulator) (Note 1) Fig. 2.24

2+0 CC (Note 4)

2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration Fig. 2.25

2x(1+1) FD CC (Note 4)

2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel configuration ( with one antenna) Fig. 2.26

2x(1+1) FD CC (Note 4)

2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel configuration ( with two antennas) Fig. 2.27

2x(1+1)HSBY CC (Note 4)

2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel configuration Fig. 2.28

N+1(2+1/3+1) (Note 4)

N+1 system with Alternate Pattern (AP) Fig. 2.29Fig. 2.30



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.21 1+0 system with independent antenna
FLEXIBLEWAVE GUIDE

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”)

ODU AP or AP/CC

VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT

FIXING ON THE RACKOF COAXIAL CABLE

IDU


2-60SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.22 1+1 system with Hot Standby
FLEXIBLEWAVE GUIDE

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”)

IDU

FIXING ON RACK OFCOAXIAL CABLE

ODU AP or AP/CC

ODU AP or AP/CC





2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.23 2+0 system with dual polarization
FLEXIBLEWAVE GUIDE

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”

IDU

FLEXIBLEWAVE GUIDE


ODU AP or AP/CC

ODU AP or AP/CC



2-62SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.24 1+1 system copolar
FLEXIBLEWAVE GUID

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”

IDU


ODU AP or AP/CC

ODU AP or AP/CC





2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.25 2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration
+ -

Ä

E O W

“IF LO” SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE

FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE

AP/CC ODU

AP/CC ODU“RF-LO” SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE

“RF-LO” SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE

COAXIAL CABLE

ETSI RACK (19”

IDU




2-64SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.26 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna)
1st IDU (1+1) V-pol.

ODU SUPPORT(1+1 co-polar)

2nd IDU (1+1) H-pol.

“RF LO” SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE


FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE

“RF LO” SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE

AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU

AP/CC ODU


AP/CC ODU

ETSI RACK (19”


COAXIAL CABLE

ODU SUPPORT(1+1 co-polar)



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.27 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two antennas)
1st IDU (1+1) V-H pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) H-V pol.

ODU SUPPORT(1+1 cross-polar)


FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE

AP/CC ODU

AP/CC ODU


ODU SUPPORT(1+1 cross-polar) “IF LO” SYNCH

CO-CHANNEL CABLE

AP/CC ODUAP/CC ODU


ETSI RACK (19”


2-66SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.28 2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration
1st IDU (1+1) HSBY V-pol.

ODU SUPPORT(1+1 HSBY)

2nd IDU (1+1) HSBY H-pol.


FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE


AP/CC ODU AP/CC ODU

AP/CC ODU


AP/CC ODU

ETSI RACK (19”


COAXIAL CABLE

ODU SUPPORT(1+1 HSBY)




2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.29 N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
+ -

Ä

ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDES

ODU (CH.1)AP or AP/CCODU (ST.BY)

APor AP/CC

ODU (CH.2)AP or AP/CC

MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)

EXP IDU (CH. 2)

ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDE



ETSI RACK (19”

COAXIAL CABLE




2-68SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.30 N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
\

+ -

Ä

ELLIPTICATL WAVE GUIDES

ODU (CH.1)AP or AP/CCODU (ST.BY)

APor AP/CC

ODU (CH.2)AP or AP/CC



ETSI RACK (19”

COAXIAL CABLE

ODU (CH.2)APor AP/CC



MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)

EXP IDU (CH. 2 + CH.3)





2 - PLANNING

2.3.2 Equipment composition
Tab. 2.42 below shows the composition of the equipment (P/N. 802-300/12) and it isused to transmit in all the available bands (6-13 GHz).

The AP system can be used in the following configurations:

– 1+0

– 1+1 HSBY

– 1+1

– 2+0

– N+1

The CC system can be used in the following configurations:

– 2+0

– 2x(1+1) FD

– 2x(1+1) Hot Standby

Note: The 64 TCM-4D modulation is available in the 6U and 11 GHz bands.

Tab. 2.42 SRA 4 equipment composition (P/N 802-300/12)

Equipment(Note)

Indoor Assembly Outdoor Assembly

ETSI Rack P/N

IDU Assembly

P/N

6 GHz P/N

7 GHz P/N

8 GHzP/N

10 GHzP/N

11 GHzP/N

13 GHz P/N

STM-1 APsystems

(64 or 128 TCM-4D)

627-65/002 702-300/12

(6L)735-211/06B

(6U)735-211/06C

735-201/07or

735-211/07

735-201/08or

735-211/08735-201/10

735-201/11or

735-211/11

735-201/13or

735-211/13

STM-1 CCsystems

(64 or 128 TCM-4D)

627-65/002 702-300/12

(6L)735-211/06B

(6U)735-211/06C

735-211/07 735-211/08 - 735-211/11 735-211/13

2-70SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.3 Indoor assembly composition
The indoor assembly consists of:

– an ETSI wired rack;

– one IDU assembly in 1+0/1+1/2+0 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.31) or two IDUassembly in N+1 configuration (refer to Fig. 2.32) or 2x(1+1) (refer to Fig. 2.33),and one “External EOW” optional assembly P/N 705-102/01 (refer to Fig. 2.31,Fig. 2.32 and Fig. 2.33).

Fig. 2.31 1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly

SRA4 IDU-STM1

WIRED RACKP/N 627-65/002

“External EOW”Assembly (optional)P/N 705-102/01

SRA4 IDU





2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.32 N+1 Indoor assembly
IDU “MAIN”UNIT


IDU “EXT”UNIT

2+1 CONFIGURATION

IDU “MAIN”UNIT


IDU “EXT”UNIT

3+1 CONFIGURATION

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


“External EOW”Assembly (option-al)

2-72SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.33 2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly
Fig. 2.34 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Indoor assembly

1st (1+1) IDU assemblyCH1+CH2 “V-pol.”

2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION

��

��



2nd (1+1) IDU assembly CH1+CH2 “H-pol.”

1st (1+1) IDU assemblyMain+Stby “V-pol.”

2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION

��

��



2nd (1+1) IDU assemblyMain+Stby “H-pol.”



2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.1 IDU equipment as a function of the configurations
The system can assume the configurations (System Types) listed in Tab. 2.43. All theconfigurations are without MST.

In Tab. 2.44 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration(1, 2, ... 6) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.47 to Tab. 2.51 show the indoor assemblycomposition.

In Tab. 2.45 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to the configuration(7, 8, 9 and 10) listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.57 to Tab. 2.58 show the indoor assemblycomposition.

In Tab. 2.46 the indoor assembly composition is set down according to configuration 11listed in Tab. 2.43. Tab. 2.59 to Tab. 2.60 show the indoor assembly composition.

1. Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.

2. Configuration without tributary protection.

3. Configuration with tributary protection.

Tab. 2.43 System types

System Type Denomination

1 1+0 1)

2 1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2)

3 1+1 Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)

4 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 1) 2)

5 1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)

6 2+0 1)

7 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)

8 2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)

9 2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)

10 2x(1+1) Hot Standby Terminal, DTI (Dual Tributary Interface) 3)

11 N+1 Terminal, STI (Single Tributary Interface) 2)

2-74SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.44 Supported units in system types 1, 2, ... 6

Ref.Fig. 2.35

andFig. 2.36

Units

System Types

1 2 3 4 5 6

A BB-MODEM unit R R R R R RB BB-MODEM unit R R R R RC Controller unit R R R R R RD Alarm restitution unit R R R R R RE Fan unit R R R R R R

Notes:

R = Required

Tab. 2.45 Supported units in system types 7, 8. 9 and 10 (2x(1+1) CC version)

Ref.Fig. 2.37

Units(IDU Assembly “V(H) Pol.”) 1+1

A BB-MODEM unit RB BB-MODEM unit RC Controller unit RD Alarm restitution unit RE Fan unit R

Ref.Fig. 2.37

Units(IDU Assembly “H(V) Pol.”) 1+1

A BB-MODEM unit RB BB-MODEM unit RC Controller unit RD Alarm restitution unit RE Fan unit R

Notes:

R = Required



2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.46 Supported units in system type 11 (2+1/3+1 version)

Ref.Fig. 2.38

Units(IDU “MAIN” unit) 2+1 3+1

A BB-MODEM unit R RB BB-MODEM unit R RC Controller unit R RD Alarm restitution unit R RE Fan unit R R

Ref.Fig. 2.38

Units(IDU “EXT” unit) 2+1 3+1

A BB-MODEM unit R RB BB-MODEM unit RC Controller unit R RD Alarm restitution unit R RE Fan unit R R

Notes:

R = Required

2-76SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.2 Indoor assembly composition (IDU)
The IDU assembly is available in 8 versions according to the configuration (1+0 or1+1/2+0/2x(1+1)/2+1/3+1) and to the interface (electrical or optical):

In the following tables are listed the units present in each version.

– 1+0 Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12A Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.47

– 1+0 Optical IDU SRA4 IDU

P/N 702-300/12B Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.49

– 1+1/2+0 Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12C Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.48

– 1+1/2+0 Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12D Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.50

– 1+0 Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

P/N 702-300/12F Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.52

– 1+0 Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

P/N 702-300/12G Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.54

– 1+1/2+0 Electrical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

P/N 702-300/12M Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.53

– 1+1/2+0 Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

P/N 702-300/12N Q.ty 1 Tab. 2.55

– 2x(1+1) Electrical IDU(SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12C Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. + H (V) Pol.

Tab. 2.57

– 2x(1+1) Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12D Q.ty 2 (IDU V(H) Pol. + H (V) Pol.

Tab. 2.58


P/N 702-300/12C Q.ty 1 (IDU “MAIN”) Tab. 2.59P/N 702-300/12A Q.ty 1 (IDU “EXT”) Tab. 2.59

– 2+1 Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12D Q.ty 1 (IDU “MAIN”) Tab. 2.60P/N 702-300/12B Q.ty 1 (IDU “EXT”) Tab. 2.60


P/N 702-300/12C Q.ty 2 (IDU “MAIN +EXT”) Tab. 2.59

– 3+1 Optical IDU (SRA4 IDU)

P/N 702-300/12D Q.ty 2 (IDU “MAIN +EXT”) Tab. 2.60



2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.47 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12A)

Ref.Fig. 2.35 Denomination P/N

A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07B Cover 224-065/54C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17

1+0 Base accessories 597-525/21

Tab. 2.48 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C)


A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07B BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


Tab. 2.49 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12B)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06B Cover 224-065/54C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


Tab. 2.50 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06B BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


2-78SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


Fig. 2.35 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly

Tab. 2.51 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration

Denomination P/N

BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)orBB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM)

612-314/07

612-314/06Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1 597-525/33

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

A

B

ED

C



2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.52 1+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F)


A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/65B Cover 332-309/89C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


Tab. 2.53 1+1/2+0 Electrical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12M)


A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/65B BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/65C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


Tab. 2.54 1+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12G)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/64B Cover 332-309/89C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


Tab. 2.55 1+1/2+0 Optical SRA4 IDU-STM1 composition (P/N 702-300/12F)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/64B BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/64C Controller unit 634-001/02D Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E Fan unit 614-041/17


2-80SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


Fig. 2.36 1+0/1+1/2+0 SRA4 IDU-STM1 systems Indoor assembly

Tab. 2.56 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 configuration

Denomination P/N

BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)orBB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM)

612-314/65

612-314/64Connection elements from 1+0 to 1+1 597-525/33

A

B

ED

C



2 - PLANNING


Note 1: Quantity 2Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link.

Note 1: Quantity 2Note 2: These accessories include the cables for the E-link.

Tab. 2.57 2x(1+1) CC Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU “V(H) Pol.” and IDU “H(V) Pol.”)


A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07B BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07F BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07G BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07

C-H Controller unit 634-001/02D-I Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66E-L Fan unit 614-041/17

Base accessories (Note 1) 597-525/22N+1 base accessories (Note 3) 597-525/57

Tab. 2.58 2x(1+1) CC Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU “V(H) Pol.” and IDU “H(V) Pol.”)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06B BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06F BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06G BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06


Base accessories (Note 1) 597-525/22Base accessories (Note 2) 597-525/21N+1 base accessories (Note 3) 597-525/57

2-82SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.37 2x(1+1) CC SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

A

B

ED

C

F

G

LI

H

IDU V(H) Pol.”unit

IDU H(V) Pol.”unit



2 - PLANNING


Note 1: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 2 for 3+1.Note 2: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 0 for 3+1.Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link.

Note 1: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 2 for 3+1.Note 2: Quantity 1 for 2+1 and quantity 0 for 3+1.Note 3: These accessories include the cables for the E-link and B-link.

Tab. 2.59 2+1/3+1 Electrical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12C for IDU Main and /12A for IDU EXT.)


A BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07B BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07F BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/07

G BB-MODEM with electrical interface (32/128 TCM) (for 3+1 only) 612-314/07



Tab. 2.60 2+1/3+1 Optical SRA4 IDU composition (P/N 702-300/12D for IDU Main and /12B for IDU EXT.)


A BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06B BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06F BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) 612-314/06

G BB-MODEM with optical interface (32/128 TCM) (for 3+1 only) 612-314/06



2-84SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.38 N+1 (2+1/3+1) SRA4 IDU systems Indoor assembly
Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

A

B

ED

C

F

G

LI

H

IDU “MAIN”unit

IDU “EXT”unit



2 - PLANNING

2.3.3.3 Licence fees
The “Licence key" (P/N 625-017/64) includes a memory, called "Memory Key",configured with the Licence required by the Customer. The last digits of the P/N describethe configurations enabled on the equipment, according to the Tab. 2.61.

Note: The licence with higher extension code includes also the facility of the licenceswith a lower extension code.

2.3.3.4 Upgrading kits for on-field upgrading of the licence types

The "Upgrading kit" (P/N 625-018/14 xxx) includes a "Program Hardware Key",equipped with Licence Credits.

Tab. 2.62 lists the list of the available upgrading kit.

Tab. 2.61 Licence key P/Ns

Base code Ext. Description SRA4IDU

SRA4IDU

STM1

625-017/64 000 License fee for STM-1 ND AP √√√√ √√√√625-017/64 010 License fee for STM-1 HD AP √√√√ √√√√625-017/64 011 License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD AP √√√√625-017/64 100 License fee for STM-1 ND CC √√√√625-017/64 110 License fee for STM-1 HD CC √√√√625-017/64 111 License fee for 2xSTM-1 HD CC √√√√

Tab. 2.62 Upgrading kit P/Ns

Base code Ext. Description

625-018/14 100 SW licence upgrading from AP to CC625-018/14 010 SW licence upgrading from ND to HD

2-86SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4 Outdoor assembly composition (ODU)
ODU is available in 2 versions:

– ODU AP for AP channelling (Fig. 2.39): par. 2.3.4.1. These ODUs are installed onthe supporting frames of par. 2.3.7.

– ODU AP/CC for AP and CC channelling (Fig. 2.40): par. 2.3.4.2. These ODUs areinstalled on the supporting frames of par. 2.3.7.

2.3.4.1 ODU AP

2.3.4.1.1 7 GHz ODU

The ODU composition is shown in Tab. 2.63.

The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.3.

Note 1:

The ODU has a 3-digit extension P/N with the following meaning:

– 1st digit: shows the channeling (shifter) + main/inter.

– 2nd and 3rd digits: show the RF channel and the mounting of the filter, which differsaccording to the operating frequency of the transmitter (lower or higher half-band).Should the 2nd digit be less than 5 it means that the Transmitter operates on thelower half-band. Should the 2nd digit be greater or equal to 5 it means that theTransmitter operates on the higher half-band.

Note 2:

In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different P/N according to the RFchanneling (refer to par. 2.2.7.3).

Tab. 2.63 7 GHz - ODU Composition

ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-201/07-xxx

Group 7 GHz ODU 128 735-201/07ADiplexer 7 GHz(Note 2)

527-705/26527-705/27527-705/31527-705/35527-705/36527-705/38



2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.2 8 GHz ODU


Note 1:




Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-201/08-xxx


527-705/61527-705/62527-705/66527-705/67527-705/70527-705/71527-705/73527-705/74

2-88SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.3 10 GHz ODU

Note 1:



– 2nd digit: differs according to the operating frequency of the transmitter (0 for lowerhalf-band or 1 for higher half-band)

– 3rd digit: duplexer filter on the lower part of the half-band (0) or on the higher partof the half-band (1).

The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.5

Note 2:

In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different 3-digit extension P/Naccording to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.5).

Tab. 2.65 10 GHz - ODU composition

ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-201/10-xxx

Group 10 GHz ODU 128Tx lower half-band

or

Group 10 GHz ODU 128Tx higher half-band

735-201/10L

oppure

735-201/10H

Duplexer 10 GHz(Nota 2)

527-904/92



2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.4 11 GHz ODU

Note 1:






Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-201/11-xxx


or


735-201/11L

or

735-201/11H

Duplexer 11 GHz(Note 2)

527-904/84

2-90SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.1.5 13 GHz ODU

Note 1:






Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-201/13-xxx13 GHz ODU 128 group 735-201/13A13 GHz Duplexer(Note 2) 527-904/74



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.39 Outdoor assembly (AP)
FRONT VIEW

TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

FEEDER FLANGE

GROUND CABLE

PC INTERFACECONNECTOR(factory use)

RX FIELD MEASUREMENTCONNECTOR

IN/OUT IF CABLECONNECTOR

2-92SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2 ODU AP/CC
2.3.4.2.1 ODU 6 GHz


Note 1:





The complete list of the available ODUs is shown in par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2

Note 2:

In every ODU is installed a duplexer which has a different 3-digit extension P/Naccording to the RF channeling (refer to par. 2.2.7.1 and par. 2.2.7.2).


ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-211/06-xxx

Group 6 GHz ODU 128Tx lower half-band (6L)

or

Group 6 GHz ODU 128Tx higher half-band (6U)

735-211/06

or

735-211/06

Duplexer 6 GHz(6L)

or

Duplexer 6 GHz(6U)

(Note 2)

527-703/57

or

527-703/58



2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.2 7 GHz ODU


Note 1:




Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-211/07-xxx


527-705/26527-705/27527-705/31527-705/35527-705/36527-705/38

2-94SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.3 8 GHz ODU


Note 1:




Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-211/08-xxx


527-705/61527-705/62527-705/65527-705/66527-705/67527-705/70527-705/71527-705/73527-705/74



2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.4 11 GHz ODU

Note 1:






Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-211/11-xxx


or


735-211/11L

or

735-211/11H

Duplexer 11 GHz(Note 2)

527-904/84

2-96SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.4.2.5 13 GHz ODU

Note 1:






Note 2:



ODU P/N(Note 1)

Made up of:

Denomination P/N

735-211/13-xxx13 GHz ODU 128 group 735-211/13A13 GHz Duplexer(Note 2) 527-904/74



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.40 Outdoor assembly (AP/CC )
In the 6 GHz ODU connector “IF LO CO-CHANNEL” is not used, because in Rxside the conversion is directly from RF to 140 MHz.

FRONT VIEW

TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

FEEDER FLANGE

GROUND CABLECONNECTION POINT



IN/OUT IF CABLECONNECTOR

367

202

RF “LO” CO-CHANNEL CONNECTOR

324

RF “LO” CO-CHANNEL CONNECTOR

2-98SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.5 IDU/ODU cable
Two different types of cable can be used:

– 3/10” 50 ohm coaxial cable refer to par. 2.3.5.1

– 1/4” 50 ohm coaxial cable refer to par. 2.3.5.2

The standard delivery includes the 3/10” coaxial cable and the max. length of theIDU/ODU connection is 190 m.

The 1/4” coaxial cable is delivered on demand and the max. length of the IDU/ODUconnection is 250 m.

2.3.5.1 3/10” 50 ohm coaxial cable

Refer to Fig. 2.41.

The 3/10” coaxial cable can be produced by two different manufacturers (Andrew andIntercond).

Tab. 2.73 Andrew cable set

P/N Description Q.ty

104-009/50 3/10” CNT300 - 50 ohm coaxial cable 597-525/78A 3/10” Braided coax cable accessories

421-008/38 coax N-plug 1421-008/35 90° coax N-plug 1333-031/21 grounding kit 1

Tab. 2.74 Intercond cable set


104-009/51 CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 ohm coaxial cable597-525/78B 3/10” Braided coax cable accessories

421-008/39 coax N-plug 1421-008/36 90° coax N-plug 1333-021/22 grounding kit 1



2 - PLANNING

2.3.5.2 1/4” 50 ohm coaxial cable
Refer to Fig. 2.41.

Tab. 2.75 Andrew cable set


104-009/42 1/4” LDF1RN - 50 ohm coaxial cable597-523/94A 1/4” coax cable accessories

L1PNM-HC “N” type coax plug 421-008/88 1L1PNR-HC 90° “N” type coax N-plug 421-008/84 1CSGL1-10B2 grounding kit 333-031/19 1

2-100SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.41 3/10” or 1/4” coaxial cable
“OSM/N” COAXIAL TAIL(L.=1 Mt.)

(314-327/91)

3/10” or 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE

(a)

TO ODUSECTION

COAXIAL N-PLUG

COAXIAL CABLEFIXING BRACKET

(232-124/20)(b)

“OSM/N” COAXIAL TAIL(L.=1 Mt.)

(314-327/91)(a)

TO IDUSECTION

(a) = This material is included in the base connection elements (1+0) 597-525/21, (1+1) 597-525/22 or (1+0>1+1)597-525/33.

(b) = This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/21and 597-525/22.



2 - PLANNING

2.3.6 ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL
Cable connections between two ODU's must be realised only when the equipment is CCconfigured: 2+0 CC, 2x(1+1) FD CC or 2x(1+1) HSBY CC.

2.3.6.1 2+0 CC configuration connections

The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 2.42.

Fig. 2.42 Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODU’s for CC configuration

Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz AP/CC ODU.

ODU 1 ODU 2

RF LO Conn.

IF LO Conn.

RF LO Conn.

IF LO Conn.

RF LO COAX CABLE

IF LO COAX CABLE

FLEX WG

FLEX WG

VH

IF COAX CABLE

TO/FROMIDU

IF COAX CABLE

TO/FROMIDU

(Note)

2-102SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.43 Connection diagram between the ODUs
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz ODU.

ODUAP/CC 1

TOP VIEW

ODUAP/CC 2

TOP VIEW

ODUAP/CC 1

BOTTOM VIEW

ODUAP/CC 2

BOTTOM VIEW

RF LO coaxial cable

IF LO coaxial cable(Note)

Antennaside

Antennaside

Antennaside

Antennaside



2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna)

Fig. 2.44 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)


RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable

ODU 1

(CH1)

V pol.

Conn. RF LO

Conn. IF LO

Flexible W.G. V H

ODU 2 (CH2)

ODU 3 (CH1)

H pol.

ODU 4 (CH2)

BB.1

BB.2

BB.1

BB.2

1st IDU

(1+1)

2nd IDU

(1+1)

IF Coax Cable

RF HYBRID

XPIC Connections

IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note)

Conn. RF LO

Conn. IF LO

Flexible W.G. IF Coax Cable

RF Loc. Osc. coax. cable

V pol. H pol.

IF Coax Cable

IF Loc. Osc.

IF Coax Cable

RF HYBRID

IF Coax Cable

IF Coax Cable

XPIC Connections

XPIC Connections

XPIC Connections

coax. cable (Note)

2-104SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.45 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)

AP/CC ODU 1TOP SIDE VIEW


RF HYBR. “V” Pol.

SIDE

RF HYBR. “H” Pol.

SIDE

1st (1+1) ODU system 2nd (1+1) ODU system


SIDE



SIDE






2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.46 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
AP/CC ODU 1BOTTOM SIDE VIEW


SIDE


SIDE

1st (1+1) ODU system 2nd (1+1) ODU system


SIDE


SIDE

RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable


AP/CC ODU 2BOTTOM SIDE VIEW AP/CC ODU 4

BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

2-106SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas)

Fig. 2.47 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)


BB.1

BB .2

BB .1

BB .2

s t IDU

1+1)

nd IDU

1+1)

X P I C C o n n e c t i o n s




V

H

1st System

2nd System

V H

R F L o c . O s c . coax. cable

O D U 1

(CH1)

V -po l .

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (note)

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

O D U 3 (CH1)

H - p o l .

IF C o a x C a b l e


F lex ib le W.G.

F lex ib le W.G.

F lex ib le W.G.

F lex ib le W.G.


O D U 2

(CH2)

H - p o l .

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

IF Loc. Osc.

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

O D U 3 (CH2)

V -po l .





coax. cable (note)



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.48 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)




RF C.P. Filter“V” Pol.SIDE

RF C.P. Filter“H” Pol.SIDE




RF C.P. Filter“H” Pol.

SIDERF C.P. Filter

“V” Pol.SIDE

2 nd (1+1) ODU system

1st (1+1) ODU system

2-108SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.49 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)
RF C.P. Filter“V” Pol.

SIDE


SIDE


SIDE


SIDE




RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable



BOTTOM SIDE VIEW



2 - PLANNING

2.3.6.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections

Fig. 2.50 Connection diagram between the ODU’s for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)



O D U 1

(MAIN)

V po l .

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

F lex ib le W.G. V H

O D U 2 (STBY)

O D U 3 (MAIN

H p o l .

O D U 4 (CH2)

BB .1

BB .2

BB .1

BB .2

1s t IDU

(1+1)

2nd IDU

(1+1)


R F C O U P L E R


IF Loc. Osc. coax. cable (Note)

C o n n . R F L O

C o n n . IF LO

F lex ib le W.G. IF C o a x C a b l e


V po l . STBY


IF Loc. Osc.







coax. cable (Note)

R F C O U P L E R

2-110SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.51 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)



RF COUPLER “V” Pol.

SIDE

1st (1+1) HSBYODU system 2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system




IF LO coaxial cable(Note) RF COUPLER

“H” Pol.SIDE


SIDE

RF COUPLER “H” Pol.

SIDE



2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.52 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)

RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable



BOTTOM SIDE VIEW


SIDE


SIDE


SIDE


SIDE


2-112SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.7 Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU)
2.3.7.1 1+0 Supporting frame

Refer to Fig. 2.53, Fig. 2.54 and Tab. 2.76.

The 1+0 supporting frame consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguideaccessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+0 configuration.

From an electrical point of view the frame is a passive device (i.e. waveguide section)that provides interconnection between its two ports with negligible insertion loss.

Fig. 2.53 1+0 Supporting frame

Tab. 2.76 1+0 Supporting frame

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port BFlange

type

534-114/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5.6 - 7.1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-114/07 7 AP or AP/CC 7.1 - 7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-114/07 8 AP or AP/CC 8.2 - 8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-114/10 10 AP 10.0 - 11.7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-114/11 11 AP or AP/CC 10.7 - 11.7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-114/13 13 AP or AP/CC 12.7 - 13.3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

ODUwaveguide Frame

B A



2 - PLANNING

POLE Ø 115 mm

1+0 FRAME

ODU

2-114SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot stand-by
2.3.7.2.1 Balanced frame


The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, andrelevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two OutdoorUnits in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) balanced configuration.

From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for balanced configuration is a 1:1coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split balanced-wise toward the twoODU’s.

Fig. 2.55 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby

Tab. 2.77 1+1 Balanced supporting frame for Hot Standby

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port B,CFlange

type


ODU

Hybrid Frame

B

A

ODUC



2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.2.2 Unbalanced frame

The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, andrelevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two OutdoorUnits in 1+1 HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced configuration.

From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for unbalanced configuration is a 10:1coupler. The signal incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the twoODU’s.

Fig. 2.56 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby

Tab. 2.78 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port B,CFlange

type


ODU

Coupler Frame

B

A

ODUC

2-116SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

POLE Ø 115 mm

1+1 FRAME

ODUODU



2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.3 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity
The 1+1 supporting frame from frequency diversity consists of a mechanical structure,and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of two OutdoorUnits in 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration.

The two ODUs are interconnected to the antenna port through a circulator. Both theODU’s transmit at the same time, delivering the signal on two RF channels at differentfrequecies on the same polarisation (Co-polar) or on different polarisation (Cross-polar).

Fig. 2.58 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar)

Tab. 2.79 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar)

Code Freq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

Guide typePort AFlange

type

Port B,CFlange

type

534-115/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5.6-7.1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-115/07 7 AP or AP/CC 7.1-7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-115/07 8 AP or AP/CC 8.2-8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84

ODU

Circulator Frame

B

A

ODUC

2-118SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Fig. 2.59 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)
Tab. 2.80 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Ports A1, A2Flange

type

Ports B, CFlange

type

534-116/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5.6 - 7.1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-116/07 7 AP or AP/CC 7.1 - 7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-116/07 8 AP or AP/CC 8.2 - 8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-116/11 11 AP or AP/CC 10.7 - 11.7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-116/13 13 AP or AP/CC 12.7 - 13.3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

ODU

Frame

B

A1

A2

C

ODU



2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.4 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
(6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz)

2.3.7.4.1 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

Refer to Fig. 2.60, Tab. 2.81 and Tab. 2.82.

The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames:

– one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54).

– one 1+1 supporting frame for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar) ref. to par. 2.3.7.3.

Fig. 2.60 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)


CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port BFlange

type

534-114/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5,6 - 7,1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-114/07 7 AP or AP/CC 7,1 - 7,9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-114/07 8 AP or AP/CC 8,2 - 8,5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84


Code Freq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)


type

Port B,CFlange

type


C

A

B

B A

1+0 frame

1+1 FD co-polar frame

Circulator

waveguide

Frame

1st ODU

2nd ODU

3th ODU

2-120SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

Refer to Fig. 2.61 and Tab. 2.83.

The 3+1 configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar)(ref. to par. 2.3.7.3)



Code Freq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)


type

Port B,CFlange

type


C

A

B

C

A

B


Circulator Frame


Circulator

1st ODU

2nd ODU

3th ODU

4th ODU



2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.5 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
(10, 11 and 13 GHz)


Refer to Fig. 2.62, Tab. 2.84 and Tab. 2.85.

The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames as follow:

– one 1+0 supporting frame (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 and Fig. 2.54)..

– one 1+1 balanced supporting frame (the same used for Hot-Standby ref. topar. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)



CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port BFlange

type

534-114/10 10 AP 10,0 - 11,7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-114/11 11 AP or AP/CC 10,7 - 11,7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-114/13 13 AP or AP/CC 12,7 - 13,3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

Tab. 2.85 1+1 Balanced supporting frame

Code Freq.Band (GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range (GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange type

Port B,CFlange type


1st ODU

Hybrid

C

A

2nd ODUB

3th ODUB A

1+0 supporting frame

1+1 Balanced supporting frame

waveguide

Frame

2-122SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING


The 3+1 configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used forHot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)



CodeFreq.Band (GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range (GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange type

Port B,CFlange type


C

A

B

C

A

B

1st ODU

Hybrid2nd ODU

3th ODU


Frame

Hybrid


4th ODU



2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6 Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration
2.3.7.6.1 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration


The 2+0 configuration needs two 1+0 supporting frames (ref. to par. 2.3.7.1 andFig. 2.54).

Fig. 2.64 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration


CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port BFlange

type

534-114/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5,6 - 7,1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-114/07 7 AP/CC 7,1 - 7,9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-114/07 8 AP/CC 8,2 - 8,5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-114/11 11 AP/CC 10,7 - 11,7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-114/13 13 AP/CC 12,7 - 13,3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

A

ODUB A

ODUB


waveguide

Frame


waveguide

2-124SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.6.2 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with
one antenna) - ODU 6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz


The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity(Co-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.3)

Fig. 2.65 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)


Code Freq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)


type

Port B,CFlange

type

534-115/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5.6-7.1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-115/07 7 AP/CC 7.1-7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-115/07 8 AP/CC 8.2-8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84

C

A

B

C

A

B


Circulator Frame


Circulator

1st ODU

2nd ODU

3th ODU

4th ODU



2 - PLANNING

one antenna) - ODU 11 GHz and 13 GHz


The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same usedfor Hot-Standby - ref. to par. 2.3.7.2.1 and Fig. 2.57)

Fig. 2.66 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna)


CodeFreq.Band (GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range (GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange type

Port B,CFlange type

534-113/11 11 AP/CC 10,7 - 11,7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-113/13 13 AP/CC 12,7 - 13,3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

C

A

B

C

A

B

1st ODU

Hybrid2nd ODU

3th ODU


Frame

Hybrid


4th ODU

2-126SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

two antennas)


The 2x(1+1) configuration need two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity(Cross-polar) (ref. to par. 2.3.7.5.)

Fig. 2.67 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas)

B

A1

A2

C

B

C

A1

A2

A1

A2

1+1 FD cross-polar frame

Frame

1+1 FD cross-polar frame

1st ODU

2nd ODU

3th ODU

4th ODU



2 - PLANNING


Tab. 2.90 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Ports A1, A2Flange

type

Ports B, CFlange

type

534-116/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5,6 - 7,1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-116/07 7 AP/CC 7,1 - 7,9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-116/07 8 AP/CC 8,2 - 8,5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-116/11 11 AP/CC 10,7 - 11,7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-116/13 13 AP/CC 12,7 - 13,3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

2-128SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


2 - PLANNING

2.3.7.7 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration
2.3.7.7.1 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11 and 13 GHz


The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 unbalanced supporting frames - ref. topar. 2.3.7.2.2 and Fig. 2.57)

Fig. 2.68 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration

Tab. 2.91 1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby

CodeFreq.Band(GHz)

ODUTYPE

Freq.Range(GHz)

W.G.Type

Port AFlange

type

Port B,CFlange

type

534-112/06 6L/6U AP/CC 5.6 - 7.1 WR137 R70 UDR70 PDR70534-112/07 7 AP/CC 7.1 - 7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-112/07 8 AP/CC 8.2 - 8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84534-112/11 11 AP/CC 10.7 - 11.7 WR90 R100 UDR100 PDR100534-112/13 13 AP/CC 12.7 - 13.3 WR75 R120 UDR120 PDR120

B

A

C

1st ODU

2nd ODU

3th ODU

1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame

Frame

4th ODU

Coupler

B

A

C

1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame

Coupler



2 - PLANNING


BLANK PAGE

2-130SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


3 INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE RACK ETSI

3.1.1 View of the rack ETSIFig. 3.1 shows the rack ETSI with the relevant overall dimensions, Fig. 3.2 shows thegeneral dimensions for the operation and Tab. 3.1 lists the types of rack ETSI. Theweight of the empty rack is approximately 57 Kg.The dimensions are pointed out by means of millimeters.

Fig. 3.1 View of the rack ETSI with overall dimensions



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.2 General dimensions for the rack ETSI operation
3-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


(*) = Provided only with SRT 1C (it is a version equipped with support and protection ofthe antenna circulators).

3.1.2 Drilling planes

3.1.2.1 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame

Fig. 3.3 and Fig. 3.4 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts.

Tab. 3.1 Rack ETSI list

CODE HEIGHTmm COLOUR CABLE SUPPORT AND

OPTICAL FIBER DUCT

301-021/01 2200 Grey RAL 7001 NO301-021/02 2200 Sand RAL 7032 NO301-021/31 1800 Sand RAL 7032 NO

627-65/001 2200 Grey RAL 7001 NO627-65/002 2200 Sand RAL 7032 NO627-65/003 2200 Sand RAL 7032 NO (*)627-65/005 1800 Sand RAL 7032 NO627-65/011 2200 Grey RAL 7001 YES627-65/012 2200 Sand RAL 7032 YES



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.3 Fixing of the lower part: floor drilling plane
Key:

1. Rack ETSI

2. Floor hole ø14mm

3. N° 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit(333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.10

4. The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator

* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to getthe angular adjustment of the rack.

3-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.4 Fixing of the upper part
Key:

1. Rack ETSI

2. Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed

3. N° 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)

4. N° 4 hexagonal head screws M10x30 (code 203-346/18D) provided into the fixingkit (333-043/81)

5. N° 4 flat washers ø10,5 (cod. 207-510/13D) provided into the fixing kit(333-043/81)

6. The pipe wrench with size 17÷19 mm has to be provided by the installationoperator.



3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.2 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.5 e Fig. 3.6 show the fixing of the rack upper and lower parts.


Key:

1. Rack ETSI

2. Floor hole ø14mm

3. N° 2 self-locking blocks M8 (code 203-360/04) provided into the fixing kit(333-043/81), for the installation procedure refer to Fig. 3.8

4. The pipe wrench with size 13mm has to be provided by the installation operator

* = Act on the levelling groups through an hexagonal bar wrench with size 6 mm to getthe angular adjustment of the rack.

3-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.6 Fixing of the upper part
Key:

1. Rack ETSI

2. Eyebolt (Standard) to be removed

3. N° 2 fixing plates (code 224-015/64) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)



6. The pipe wrench with size 17÷19 mm has to be provided by the installationoperator.



3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.3 Wall installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
Fig. 3.7 show the fixing of the rack upper part.


Key:

1. Rack ETSI

2. N° 2 wall fixing plates (code 232-334/77) provided into the fixing kit (333-043/81)



5. The pipe wrench with size 17÷19 mm has to be provided by the installationoperator

6. Floor hole ø9 mm

7. N° 2 expandable blocks M5 (cod. 165-010/08) provided into the fixing kit(333-043/81)

8. The medium screwdriver has to be provided by the installation operator.

Do not fix the rack one each other in their upper part by means of the plates (code224-015/64)

3-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.4 In-line installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame on
floating floor or on wall

Fig. 3.8 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks.The drilling point corresponding to the elliptic hole present on the fixing bracket dependson the position where it is installed the rack.The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer toTab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3).

Fig. 3.8 Drilling plane for the in-line fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor and on wall



3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.5 Back-to-back installation of the Rack ETSI without combining frame
on floating floor

Fig. 3.9 shows the drilling plane for the fixing of the Racks.The fixing material is an optional one and it has to be provided separately (refer toTab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3).

Fig. 3.9 Drilling plane for the back-to-back fixing of the Rack ETSI on floating floor

3-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.6 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolts
for floors

Fig. 3.10 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installationprocedure.N° 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81).

Fig. 3.10 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for floor



3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.2.7 Characteristics and installation procedure of the expansion bolts
for walls

Fig. 3.11 shows the characteristics of the bolt and the corresponding installationprocedure.N° 2 of these bolts are provided with the fixing kit for the rack ETSI (333-043/81).

Fig. 3.11 Characteristics and installation procedure of the self-locking bolt for walls

3-12SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.3 Connections
3.1.3.1 Ground connections for the rack ETSI

Fig. 3.12 shows the ground connections relevant to the rack ETSI that have to berealized.

Fig. 3.12 Ground connections of the Rack ETSI

* = This ground cable is comprised into the ETSI rack (627-65/003)



3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.4 Composition of the fixing kit
Tab. 3.2 and Tab. 3.3 lists the fixing materials for racks ETSI.

For the installation of the Racks ETSI on wooden floors, use n° 2 screws M8x45; for thewall fixing, use wooden screws M5x25 to be bought on site.

Tab. 3.2 Fixing kit for racks ETSI (333-043/81)

OPTION CODE DESCRIPTION M.U. Q.TY

1. 203-360/04 SELF-LOCKING BOLTSM8 Nr. 22. 165-010/04 EXPANSION BOLTS M5 Nr. 23. 224-015/64 FIXING PLATE Nr. 24. 203-346/18D HEXAGONAL HEAD SCREWS M10x30 Nr. 45. 207-510/13D FLAT WASHERS Ø10,5 Nr. 46. 232-334/77 PLATE FOR WALL FIXING Nr. 27. 147-016/02 ANTI-STATIC ENVELOPE Nr. 18. 147-101/12 PAPERBOARD BOX Nr. 1

Tab. 3.3 Fixing kit for racks ETSI for floating floors (Optional) (332-309/36)

OPTION CODE DESCRIPTION M.U. Q.TY

1. 205-451/82 STAINLESS STEEL TIE ROD M8 Nr. 22. 224-303/25 ANCHORING BRACKET Nr. 23. 206-702/15D NUT M8 Nr. 24. 207-505/12D FLAT WASHER Nr. 25. 207-501/12D SPRING WASHER Nr. 2

3-14SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONThe equipment is made up by a BB assembly (IDU) that is housed into a ETSI type rackand by a transceiver (ODU) that is inserted into a box to be installed outdoor near theantenna.

This paragraph contains the information necessary to make easier on site theinstallation procedures of the BB assembly (and eventually of the Q-Adapter unit ifequipped) and of the power supply distribution panel inside the ETSI rack. It providesalso the installation instructions of the ODU on the outdoor pole support (with or withoutantenna).

3.2.1 IDU installation in the ETSI rackInsert the cage nuts into the square slots of the rack, on the desired positions.

Fix the sub-rack by means of four screws M6x16.

Connect the coaxial cables as pointed out into the par. 3.4 – "EXTERNALCONNECTIONS".

The connection cables with the ODU are housed along the side wall of the rack.

3.2.2 ODU

3.2.2.1 General

In this paragraph all the operations are described, required for the mechanicalinstallation of equipments.

During the installation, while lifting the antenna and/or the outdoor polesupporting frame, it is strictly forbidden to stand or transit in the area below; thearea has to be suitably delimited or signaled according to regulations in force.For the operations to be realized outside on antenna, frame, ODU, all the requiredsafeties, according to the regulations in force, against accidental falls of theoperators have to be observed like the presence ot railings, safety bolts, etc.

To lift the ODU use only the eyebolt shown in Fig. 3.13.



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.2.2 ODU Layout
Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possible tosee the connectors for the Rx field measurement and for the PC interface and theeyebolt which must be used to lift and to move the ODU. The eyebolt can be used alsoax fixing point of the connection for the ground cable. The bottom view allows to see theIN/OUT connector of the IF cable.

Fig. 3.13 shows the ODU (AP/CC) (front view and top view). In the top view it is possibleto see the connectors for the Rx field measurement for the PC interface and IF-LOsynch. co-channel connections. The bottom view allows to see the IN/OUT connector ofthe IF cable and RF-LO synch. co-channel connections.

3.2.2.3 ODU flanges

Tab. 3.4 ODU Flanges

Frequency bands (GHz) Flange

6 (5.9 - 7.1) UDR 707 (7.1 - 7.9) UDR 848 (8.2 - 8.5) UDR 84

10 (10.0 - 11.7) UDR 10011 (10.7 - 11.7) UDR 10013 (12.7 - 13.3) UDR 120

3-16SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.13 ODU (AP) layout

PC INTERFACECONNECTOR

(factory use)

EYEBOLT

IN/OUT CABLECONNECTOR

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.14 ODU (AP/CC) Layout
Note: in the 6 GHz ODU this connector is not used (a cover is present).

RF-LOCO-CHANNEL SYNC CONNECTORIN/OUT CABLE

CONNECTOR



IF-LOCO-CHANNEL SYNC CONNECTOR(Note)

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

3-18SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.3 1+0 FRAME INSTALLATION
To install the 1+0 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts andlock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.15.

Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.16, and insert the O-rings.

Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.17 and tighten the four fixingscrews.

Fig. 3.19 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+0 configuration.

3.2.3.1 1+0 Frame - P/N and flanges

This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs

Tab. 3.5 1+0 frame - P/N and flanges

RF FREQUENCY BAND(GHz)

1+0 FRAMEP/N

TYPE OF FLANGE(to Antenna)

6L-6U 534-114/06 UDR 707 534-114/07 UDR 848 534-114/07 UDR 8410 534-114/10 UDR 10011 534-114/11 UDR 10013 534-114/13 UDR 120



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.15 1+0 frame - Pole fixing
POLE Ø 115 mm

1+0 FRAME

3-20SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.16 1+0 frame - O-Rings
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

COVER

COVER

O-RING

O-RINGS



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.17 1+0 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWS

ODU

3-22SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.18 1+0 frame - installed ODU


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.4 1+1 frame installation
To install the 1+1 frame fix it to the pole by using the two bracket and relevant nuts andlock nuts as shown in Fig. 3.19.

Remove the protection cover shown in Fig. 3.20, and insert the O-rings.

Install the ODU on the support frame as shown in Fig. 3.21 and tighten the four fixingscrews.

Fig. 3.22 shows the ODU installed on the frame in 1+1 configuration.

3.2.4.1 1+1 Frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N

This informations are valid for AP and AP/CC ODUs

Tab. 3.6 1+1 frame - Attenuation, type of flange and P/N

FrequencybandRF

(GHz)

1+1 FrameHSBY Balanced

1+1 FrameHSBY Unbalanced

Type of flange (to Antenna)

P/NCoupling

Attenuation(dB)

P/N

CouplingAttenuation

(dB)

MAIN ST.BY6L/6U 534-113/06 3 + 0.3 534-112/06 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 70

7 534-113/07 3 + 0.3 534-112/07 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 848 534-113/07 3 + 0.3 534-112/07 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 8410 534-113/10 3 + 0.3 534-112/10 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 10011 534-113/11 3 + 0.3 534-112/11 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 10013 534-113/13 3 + 0.3 534-112/13 ≤ 1.5 10 + 1.5 UDR 120

FrequencybandRF

(GHz)

1+1 FrameFrequency Diversity

(Co-polar)

1+1 FrameFrequency Diversity

(Cross-polar) Type of flange (to Antenna)

P/NCoupling

Attenuation(dB)

P/NCoupling

Attenuation(dB)

6L/6U 534-115/06 ≤ 0.1 534-116/06 ≤ 0.1 UDR 707 534-115/07 ≤ 0.1 534-116/07 ≤ 0.1 UDR 848 534-115/07 ≤ 0.1 534-116/07 ≤ 0.1 UDR 8411 - - 534-116/11 ≤ 0.1 UDR 10013 - - 534-116/13 ≤ 0.1 UDR 120

3-24SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.19 1+1 frame - Pole fixing
POLE Ø 115 mm

1+1 FRAME



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.20 1+1 frame - O-Rings
(*) - THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE FRAME

COVER

COVER

O-RING

O-RINGS

COVER

3-26SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.21 1+1 frame - ODU installation
FIXING SCREWSODU



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.22 1+1 frame - installed ODUs
3-28SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.5 Solar shield
The ODU is protected with a solar shield fixed through 4 screws.

Install the shield on the equipment and tighten the 4 screws as shown in Fig. 3.23.

Fig. 3.23 Solar shield installation

ODU

SOLAR SHIELD

SCREW



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6 Not integrated system (solution with flexible waveguide)
3.2.6.1 1+0 system

Fig. 3.24 Connections (1+0 System)7 - ODU frame8 - Flexible waveguide support

P = PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE

U = UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Flexible waveguide

“VERTICAL”POLARIZATION

“HORIZONTAL”POLARIZATION

3-30SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.2 1+1 HSBY system
Fig. 3.25 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Flexible waveguide7 - ODU frame8 - Flexible waveguide support



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.3 2+0 system
Fig. 3.26 Connections (2+0 system)

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Flexible waveguide7 - ODU frame8 - Flexible waveguide support

3-32SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.4 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one
antenna)

Fig. 3.27 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)

1 2

3

44

67

710

9

5

8

4

4

9

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Flexible waveguide7 - ODU frame8 - Flexible waveguide support9 - RF LO synch. cables10 - IF LO synch. cables



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.5 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two
antennas)

Fig. 3.28 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)

1

1

2

3

3

4

4

4

4

6

6

6 7

7

8

10

9

9

5

8

6 10


3-34SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.6.6 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel
Fig. 3.29 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)

1 2

3

44

67

710

9

5

8

4

4

9




3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7 Not integrated system (solution with elliptical waveguide)
3.2.7.1 1+0 system

Fig. 3.30 Connections (1+0 system)1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Elliptical waveguide

7 - ODU frame8 - Elliptical waveguide support

P = PRESSURIZABLE FLANGE

U = UNPRESSURIZABLE FLANGE

“VERTICAL”POLARIZATION

“HORIZONTAL”POLARIZATION

90° “E” BEND

TWIST

PRESSURIZATIONWINDOW

RIGHTSECTION

UNIVERSAL CLAMPAND RUBBER BUSY

3-36SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.2 1+1 system HSBY
Fig. 3.31 Connections (1+1 Hot Standby system)

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Elliptical waveguide7 - ODU frame



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.3 2+0 system
Fig. 3.32 Connections (2+0 system)

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Elliptical waveguide7 - ODU frame

3-38SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.4 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with one
antenna)

Fig. 3.33 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with one antenna)

5

4 4

6

4

4

8

1 2

3

7 5

7

9

8

1 - Antenna2 - Pole diam 115 mm3 - Antenna support4 - ODU5 - 1/4 “ coaxial cable (IF cable)6 - Elliptical waveguide7 - ODU frame8 - RF LO synch. cables9 - IF LO synch. cables



3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.5 2x(1+1) FD system with dual polarization co-channel (with two
antennas)

Fig. 3.34 Connections (2x(1+1) FD CC system with two antennas)

4

4

9

4

8

1

2

3

7

5

7

1

5

4

9

8


3-40SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.6 2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization co-channel
Fig. 3.35 Connections (2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC system)

5

4 4

6

4

4

8

1 2

3

7 5

7

9

8




3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.7 Static desiccator for small system
Fig. 3.36 Static desiccator for small system

3.2.7.8 Pressurization with external dehydrator

Fig. 3.37 Pressurization with external dehydrator

Before inserting the static desiccator, it it recommended to clear the waveguide usingnitrogen or dry air with a double quantity respect to the volume of the installedwaveguide.

IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR SMALL AND SHORT WAVEGUIDE RUN UP TO:5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz)

* = TYPICAL SERVICE LIFE IS ONE YEAR.

WAVEGUIDE CONNECTORODU SIDE

STATIC DESICCATOR

IT IS RECOMMENDED FOR WAVEGUIDE RUN OVER:5 m (7 GHz) AND 6 m (8 GHz)

WAVEGUIDE CONNECTORODU SIDE EXTERNAL

DEHYDRATOR

DEHYDRATORPIPE

136-510/11

3-42SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.7.9 P/N and composition
ODU 6 GHz

Tab. 3.7 Elliptical waveguide (31263-XXX): composition

ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1a Elliptical waveguide (6L)1b Elliptical waveguide (6U)2 Adapter for angular (10 pcs)3a Waveguide clamp (10 pcs)3b Waveguide clamp (10 pcs)

Tab. 3.8 Connectors and accessories (31263-778SR): composition

ITEM Description P/N Q.tya1 Waveguide connector (6L)(PDR 70)a2 Waveguide connector (6U) (PDR 70)b Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 70)d Waveguide supporte Universal clamp (diam. 62)f1 Rubber bush (diam. 62)f2 Rubber bush (diam. 62)A 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 70)B Right section (PDR-PDR 70)C Twist (UDR-PDR 70)E Adapter (UDR70-UDR70)



3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 7 GHz
Note 1 - Quantity to be defined as per plant requirements.

Note 2 - Optional, use for horizontal polarization only.

Note 3 - For channelling 7.1-7.4 GHz (shifter 161 MHz) and 7.4-7.7 GHz (shifter 154,161, 168 MHz).

Note 4 - For channelling 7.4-7.9 GHz (shifter 245 MHz).

Note 5 - Do not supply with antennas ø ≥ 1.8 m.

Note 6 - Supply with antennas ø ≥ 1.8 m.

Tab. 3.9 Elliptical waveguide (31263-750): composition

ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1a Elliptical waveguide (EWP 64-71) 127-042/05 note 1-31b Elliptical waveguide (EWP 77-71W) 127-042/14 note 1-42 Adapter for angular (10 pcs) 165-005/84 note 13a Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/69 note 1-33b Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/70 note 1-4


ITEM Description P/N Q.tya1 Waveguide connector EWP 64-71 (PDR 84) 504-237/99 2

note 3a2 Waveguide connector EWP 77-71W (PDR 84) 504-237/87 2

note 4b Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 84) 308-005/16 1d Waveguide support 332-055/21 3e Universal clamp (diam. 62) 165-005/19 3f1 Rubber bush (diam. 62) 332-202/90 3

note 3f2 Rubber bush (diam. 62) 332-202/87 3

note 4A 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 84) 504-393/36 1

note 5B Right section (PDR-PDR 84) 504-816/27 1C Twist (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 1

note 2E Adapter (UDR70-UDR84) 504-216/21 1

note 6

3-44SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 8 GHz



ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1 Elliptical waveguide (EWP 77-77) 127-042/06 note 12 Adapter for angular (10 pcs) 165-005/84 note 13 Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/70 note 1


ITEM Description P/N Q.tya Waveguide connector (PDR 84) 504-237/87 2b Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 84) 308-005/16 1d Waveguide support 332-055/21 3e Universal clamp (diam. 62) 165-005/19 3f Rubber bush (diam. 62) 332-202/87 3A 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 84) 504-393/36 1B Right section (PDR-PDR 84) 504-816/27 1C Twist (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 1

note 2



3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 10 GHz



Tab. 3.13 Elliptical waveguide (31263-YYY): composition

ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1 Elliptical waveguide note 12 Adapter for angular (10 pcs) 165-005/84 note 13 Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/71 note 1

Tab. 3.14 Connectors and accessories (31263-YYYSR): composition

ITEM Description P/N Q.tya Waveguide connector (PDR 100) 2b Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 100) 308-005/34 1d Waveguide support 332-055/21 3e Universal clamp (diam. 38) 165-005/17 3f Rubber bush (diam. 38) 332-202/81 3A 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 100) 504-418/52 1 (note 5)B Right section (PDR-PDR 100) 504-816/33 1C Twist (UDR-PDR 100) 504-657/01 1 (note 2)

3-46SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 11 GHz




ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1 Elliptical waveguide (EWP 90-107) 127-042/07 note 12 Adapter for angular (10 pcs) 165-005/84 note 13 Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/71 note 1


ITEM Description P/N Q.tya Waveguide connector (PDR 100) 504-237/88 2b Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 100) 308-005/34 1d Waveguide support 332-055/21 3e Universal clamp (diam. 38) 165-005/17 3f Rubber bush (diam. 38) 332-202/81 3A 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 100) 504-418/52 1 (note 5)B Right section (PDR-PDR 100) 504-816/33 1C Twist (UDR-PDR 100) 504-657/01 1 (note 2)



3 - INSTALLATION

ODU 13 GHz




ITEM Description P/N Q.ty1 Elliptical waveguide (EWP 127) 127-042/08 note 12 Adapter for angular (10 pcs) 165-005/84 note 13 Waveguide clamp (10 pcs) 165-005/72 note 1


ITEM Description P/N Q.tyf Waveguide connector (PDR 120) 504-237/89 2h Pressurization window (UDR-UDR 120) 308-005/35 1i Waveguide support 332-055/21 3l Universal clamp (diam. 38) 165-005/17 3n Rubber bush (diam. 38) 332-202/83 3p 90° P.E. bend (UDR-UDR 120) 504-418/53 1 (note 5)q Right section (PDR-PDR 120) 504-816/34 1r Twist (UDR-PDR 120) 504-657/11 1 (note 2)

3-48SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


3.3 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS ( for SRA4 IDU only)The internal connections are based on the equipment configuration and on the type ofchannelling implemented.

1. 2+0 CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.1):The internal connections must be made between the two ODU's and on the IDU.

2. 2x(1+1) FD CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.2 and par. 3.3.3)

3. 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configured equipment (par. 3.3.4)

4. N+1 configured equipment (par. 3.3.5):The internal connections must be made between the two IDU's.

3.3.1 2+0 CC ConfigurationTo set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on theIDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.38 and Fig. 3.39).

Fig. 3.38 IDU assembly with CC configuration connections

Note: These cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

CONNECTIONS forCC CONFIGURATION (Note)



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.39 ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections
ODUAP/CC 1

TOP VIEW

ODUAP/CC 2

TOP VIEW

ODUAP/CC 1

BOTTOM VIEW

ODUAP/CC 2

BOTTOM VIEW

RF LO coaxial cable

IF LO coaxial cable

Antennaside

Antennaside

Antennaside

Antennaside

3-50SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna)
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on theIDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 3.40, Fig. 3.41 and Fig. 3.42).


Note: Cables P/N 314-107/97 L=150mm, these cables are included in theP/N 702-300/12.

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)

CH. 1

CH. 2

IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

CH. 1

CH. 2

“V-pol”.

“H-pol”.

E-link




3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.41 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)




SIDE


SIDE

1st (1+1) ODU system 2 nd (1+1) ODU system


SIDE



SIDE




3-52SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.42 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)


SIDE


SIDE

1st (1+1) ODU system 2 nd (1+1) ODU system


SIDE


SIDE

RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable



BOTTOM SIDE VIEW



3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas)



Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

CH. 1V-POL

1+1 IDU ( V-H) pol.

E-link

CH. 1H-POL.

CH. 2H-POL.

CH.2V-POL.


1+1 IDU (H-V) pol.

3-54SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.44 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)




RF C.P. Filter“V” Pol.SIDE


SIDE





SIDERF C.P. Filter

“V” Pol.SIDE





3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.45 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)

SIDE

RF C.P. Filter“H” Pol.SIDE


SIDE


SIDE




RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable



BOTTOM SIDE VIEW

3-56SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration



Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key I O

IF

V11 In Out

WST STM-1 #1 In Out

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

IF

V11 In Out WST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB I O

D ‘

In Out

CO-CH ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

In U n.

F A N

ODU ALM

CABLE

ALM

U S E R

U S E R

STM-1 #2 In Out

STM-1 #1 In Out

STM-1 #2 In Out

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)

MAIN

STBY

IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

MAIN

STBY

“V-pol”.

“H-pol”.

E-link




3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.47 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby))






IF LO coaxial cable(Note)RF COUPLER

“V” Pol.SIDE



SIDE


SIDE


SIDE

3-58SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.48 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)

RF LO coaxial cable

RF LO coaxial cable



BOTTOM SIDE VIEW


SIDE



SIDE


SIDE


SIDE



3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.5 N+1 Configuration
The connections between the IDU assemblies shown in Fig. 3.49 must be made in orderto set up the supervisory link (E-link) and the protection link (B-link).

Fig. 3.49 Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link)

Note: These cables are included in the N+1 base connection elements(P/N 597-525/57).

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDUEXT

STBY

IDUMAIN

CH. 1

CH. 2

E-link (Note) B-link (Note)

CH. 3

3-60SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


3.4 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

All the connectors used for the external connections are easily accessible from the frontside of the indoor assembly.

All the cables from/to the outside are brought down from the cabinet top inside the sidewall slots or, in the case the wiring is running under the raised floor, they are made toascend likewise.

3.4.1 SRA4 IDU

3.4.1.1 Primary supply voltage connection

The outdoor assembly (ODU) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration).

The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform thedelivered -48 V voltage.

The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-polesmale connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.

Fig. 3.50 Primary Power Supply Connections

Soldering side view

Pin No Signal

A1 -VBATA2 +VBAT

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆

In Out

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s STM-1 #1

OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

Main powerinput

-link

A2 A1



3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.2 Connector functions
Fig. 3.52 to Fig. 3.56 and Tab. 3.19 to Tab. 3.25, show the positions and functions of theconnectors P/N 598-645/45.

Fig. 3.51 Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration

In the N+1 configuration the connectors with a cross in Fig. 3.51 are not used.

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDUEXT

STBY

IDUMAIN

CH. 1

CH. 2

E-link B-link

CH. 3

3-62SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.52 155 Mbit/s Tributary Coaxial Connections
Tab. 3.19 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax. Signal

IN 155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)OUT 155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)

Tab. 3.20 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC Signal

IN Optical Tributary InputOUT Optical Tributary Output

Electrical interface

Optical interface

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

IF


OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

Alarm IDU PWR

Q-lan E- LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11 In OutWST STM-1 #1

InOutPS

ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHBI O

∆

IF

V11 In OutWST

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHBI O

∆‘

In Out

CO-CHODU ALM

CABLE ALM InU

n.

FAN

ODU ALM

CABLE ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

STM 1 #1

IN OUT

STM 1 #2

IN OUT

STM 1 #1

OUT IN

STM 1 #2

OUT IN

link

link



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.53 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections
Fig. 3.54 Alarm Connector

Tab. 3.21 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections

Connect. Position Description

IN 2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS InputOUT 2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Output

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

IF


OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

WS

IN OUT

link

113

25 14

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆

In Out

IF


OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

ALARMS

link

3-64SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION


Interface B = electronic contact normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm)alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)

Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 – "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electricalinterface of the alarms.

Tab. 3.22 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)

Pin Signal Description Interface type1 ALIM OFF No secondary power supply on both

BB-Modem unitsB

2 CRITICAL Critical alarm B3 MINOR Minor alarm B8 MAJOR Major alarm B9 TEST Test/Warning alarm B4 CEN-OUT1 Station command output #1 B10 CEN-OUT2 Station command output #2 B5 CEN-OUT3 Station command output #3 B11 CEN-OUT4 Station command output #4 B6 CEN-IN1 Station alarm input #1 B12 CEN-IN2 Station alarm input #2 B7 CEN-IN3 Station alarm input #3 B13 CEN-IN4 Station alarm input #4 B14 RESTFAULT B15 RESTFAULTN B16 - Not used -17 - Not used -18 - Not used -19 - Not used -20 - Not used -21 - Not used -22 - Not used -23 - Not used -24 - Not used -25 - Not used -

INPUT STATION ALARMS:– the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V– the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V

and 75 V.

OUTPUTS ALARMS:– the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage

or negative voltage:• “open” resistance > 500 Mohm• “ground” resistance < 1 ohm• max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc• max. switching current: 0.5 A• max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.55 LCT (RS 232) Connector
Tab. 3.23 LCT (RS 232) Connector

PIN Signal I/O Description

1 F_CD I Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect)

2 F_RXD I Received Data3 F_TXD O Transmit Data4 F_DTR O Data Terminal Ready5 GND Signal Ground6 F_DSR I Data Set Ready7 F_RTS O Request To Send8 F_CTS Clear To Send9 n.c. Ring Indicator

1 5

6 9

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆

In Out

IF


OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

LCT

link

3-66SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.56 64 kbit/s service channel connector
Tab. 3.24 V.11 channel connector


8 CKB O Clock B - codirectional output7 CKA O Clock A - codirectional output6 DB O Data B - codirectional output5 DA O Data A - codirectional output4 CKB O Clock B - contradirectional output3 CKA O Clock A - contradirectional output2 DB I Data B - contradirectional input1 DAa I Data A - contradirectional input

In case the“External EOW”should be used, use the V11 connector as follows:- 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit- N+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the lower BB-MODEM unit of theMAIN IDU

- 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units.

Tab. 3.25 G.703 channel connector


1 OUT - O Output -2 OUT + O Output +3 - - -4 - - -5 - - -6 - - -7 IN + I Input +8 IN - I Input -

Alarm IDU PWR

IF

V11In Out2MBit/s

PS

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

Q-lan E- LCT

Key I O

CHA CHB ODU ALM

CABLEALM I O

∆

In Out

IF


OutInPS

Exp. Port

CO-CH ODU PWR

G703

CHA CHB ODUALM

CABLEALM I O

∆In Out

USER

USER

STM-1 #2OutIn

STM-1 #1OutIn

STM-1 #2OutIn

Exp. Port

link

1 8



3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3 Base connection elements
In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during theinstallation.

3.4.1.3.1 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21)

Refer to Tab. 3.26.

Tab. 3.26 Connection elements for 1+0 system (P/N 597-525/21)

Ref. Fig. 3.57 P/N Description Q.ty

6 332-308/64 Power supply kit 114 422-030/83 Metal shell 115 422-062/61 Sub-D conn 25P 116 422-053/63 Modular plug 8P shielded 426 421-015/70 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug 630 314-302/70 Earth cable 132 206-701/06D Hexagonal thin nuts M4 133 207-505/09D Plain washer SST 4 PIC 134 207-501/09D Spring washer Inox 4 161 206-710/21 Cage nut M6 462 205-534/11D Screw 6x16 463 211-516/01 Bush 6x3.5 465 332-309/76 Mounting kit 180 314-327/91 (N-OSM) coaxial cable 182 332-011/35 IDU/ODU cable clampe kit 1

3-68SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.1.3.2 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22)
Refer to Tab. 3.27.

3.4.1.3.3 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33)

Refer to Tab. 3.28.

Tab. 3.27 Connection elements for 1+1/2+0 system (P/N 597-525/22)



Tab. 3.28 Connection elements for upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 (P/N 597-525/33)


6 332-308/64 Power supply kit 116 422-053/63 Modular plug 8P shielded 226 421-015/70 1.0/2.3 coaxial plug 680 314-327/91 (N-OSM) coaxial cable 1



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.57 Connection kit for 1+0 system
E-Link interface

16

6

PWR 1

30

To connect to the rack ground

34

33

32

62

61

63

* = Only for electrical STM-1 traffic

65

“Q” interface

26*

STM-1 in 2STM-1 out 2

26*


26

2 Mbit/s out2 Mbit/s in

16

64 kbit/s V11 interface64 kbit/s G703 interface

80 IDU-ODUcable

Alarms interface

14

15

3-70SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.58 Connection kit for 1+1/2+0 system
E-Link interface

16

30To connect to the rack ground 34

33

32

62

61

63


65

“Q” interface

26*


26*


26

2 Mbit/s out2 Mbit/s in

16


80 IDU-ODUcable

Alarms interface

14

15

26*

STM-1 in 26

PWR 1

STM-1 out 2

26*


26

2 Mbit/s out2 Mbit/s in16




3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.59 Connection kit for 1+0 to 1+1/2+0 upgrading

26*

STM-1 in 2 6

PWR 1

STM-1 out 2

26*


26*

2 Mbit/s out2 Mbit/s in16


80 IDU-ODUcable

3-72SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2 SRA4 IDU-STM1
3.4.2.1 Primary supply voltage connection

The outdoor assembly (Transceiver) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly(P/N 702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1configuration).

The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform thedelivered -48 V voltage.

The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-polesmale connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 3.50.

Fig. 3.60 Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly

Soldering side view

Pin No Signal

A1 -VBATA2 +VBAT

Main powerinput

A2 A1



3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.2 Connector functions
Fig. 3.61 to Fig. 3.64 and Tab. 3.29 to Tab. 3.34, show the positions and functions of theconnectors P/N 598-645/45.

Fig. 3.61 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Tab. 3.29 155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax. Signal

IN 155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)OUT 155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)

Tab. 3.30 STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC SignalIN Optical Tributary Input

OUT Optical Tributary Output

Electrical interface

Optical interface

STM 1

IN OUT

STM 1

OUT IN

3-74SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.62 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly)
Interface B = electronic contact normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm)alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)

Tab. 3.31 Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)

Pin Signal Description Interface type1 ALIM OFF No secondary power supply on both

BB-Modem unitsB

2 CRITICAL Critical alarm B3 MINOR Minor alarm B8 MAJOR Major alarm B9 TEST Test/Warning alarm B4 CEN-OUT1 Station command output #1 B10 CEN-OUT2 Station command output #2 B5 CEN-OUT3 Station command output #3 B11 CEN-OUT4 Station command output #4 B6 CEN-IN1 Station alarm input #1 B12 CEN-IN2 Station alarm input #2 B7 CEN-IN3 Station alarm input #3 B13 CEN-IN4 Station alarm input #4 B14 RESTFAULT B15 RESTFAULTN B16 - Not used -17 - Not used -18 - Not used -19 - Not used -20 - Not used -21 - Not used -22 - Not used -23 - Not used -24 - Not used -25 - Not used -

113

25 14ALARMS



3 - INSTALLATION


Note: Refer also to par. 2.2 – "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electricalinterface of the alarms.

INPUT STATION ALARMS:– the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is less than 5 V– the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is between -70 V

and 75 V.

OUTPUTS ALARMS:– the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage

or negative voltage:• “open” resistance > 500 Mohm• “ground” resistance < 1 ohm• max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc• max. switching current: 0.5 A• max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W

3-76SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.63 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf)
Tab. 3.32 LCT (RS 232) Connector


1 F_CD I Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect)

2 F_RXD I Received Data3 F_TXD O Transmit Data4 F_DTR O Data Terminal Ready5 GND Signal Ground6 F_DSR I Data Set Ready7 F_RTS O Request To Send8 F_CTS Clear To Send9 n.c. Ring Indicator

1 5

6 9LCT



3 - INSTALLATION

Fig. 3.64 64 kbit/s service channel connector
Tab. 3.33 V.11 channel connector


8 CKB O Clock B - codirectional output7 CKA O Clock A - codirectional output6 DB O Data B - codirectional output5 DA O Data A - codirectional output4 CKB O Clock B - contradirectional output3 CKA O Clock A - contradirectional output2 DB I Data B - contradirectional input1 DAa I Data A - contradirectional input

In case the“External EOW”should be used, use the V11 connector as follows:- 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BB-MODEM unit- 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units.

Tab. 3.34 G.703 channel connector


1 OUT - O Output -2 OUT + O Output +3 - - -4 - - -5 - - -6 - - -7 IN + I Input +8 IN - I Input -

1 8

3-78SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.2.3 External connection elements
In the following paragraph is given the information on the cables to be used during theinstallation.


Refer to Tab. 3.35.






3 - INSTALLATION

Refer to Tab. 3.36.




3-80SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.4.3 ODU connections for “received field measurement”
The ODU has a BNC connector for the measurement of the received field (seeFig. 3.65).

Fig. 3.65 Connector for the measurement of received field

For factory use

BNC connectorfor Rx fieldmeasurement

TOP VIEW ODU AP/CC

TOP VIEW ODU AP

For factory use

BNC connectorfor Rx fieldmeasurement

For factory use

For factory use



3 - INSTALLATION


3.5 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED OR 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE

3.5.1 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - ODU side connectionFig. 3.66 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - ODU side connection

(a) For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6.(b) For P/N of 1/4” coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.

Coaxial connector90° “N” type

Braided or 1/4” IN/OUTcoaxial cable

To IDU section

To IDU section

(a)(b)

(a)(b)

3-82SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.2 Grounding connections
Fig. 3.67 Grounding connections

(a) For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4” coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.(b) For the fixing of the Braided or 1/4” coaxial cables see Fig. 3.69.(c) The standard delivery includes only one grounding kit to be installed before the entrance of the shelter/

equipment room. Additional grounding kits are provided on demand.(d) This cable is provided with the electrical installation kit 597-525/05(e) For the fixing of the ground plate see Fig. 3.68. (f) Optional item, if required must be separately provided.

To connect to the station grounding

system

Bending radius

Connect to Station Main Earting

(d)

Ground cable1x16 mm2

(d) Grounding plate333-047/07

(on request)

(a) (b)

(a) (b)

(d)(e)

(f)

Groundingkit (a) (c)

(b) (a)

Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable

Grounding plate333-309/91

(on request)





3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.3 Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)
Fig. 3.68 Pole fixing of the grounding plate kit (P/N 332-309/91)

(a) These materials are included in P/N 332-309/91.(b) These materials are provided with installation kit 314-205/76(c) This cable is provided with electrical material 597-525/05

Plate332-004/92

Tie223-002/86 (a)

(a)

Grouding plate257-41/507

(a)

(b)

(b)

Screw

Terminal tube ∅16 mm2

Grounding cable1x16 mm2 YE-GR

(b) Hex nut

Spring washer(b)Plain washer

(b)

(c)

3-84SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Typical fixing
Fig. 3.69 Braided or 1/4“ coaxial cable - Typical fixing

(a) N° 10 external black tie, for the fixing of the cable running on the pole, are included in the installation kit (314-205/76).

(b) Material to be adopted according to the installation requirements, is not included in the installation materials, if required must be separately provided. Refer to PAR. 3.5.4.1 for the Braided cable recommended spacing andrefer to PAR. 3.5.4.2 for the 1/4” cable recommended spacing.

Cable tie(223-009/27)

Universalcable clamp(332-202/95)(332-202/96)

(a)

(b)

Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable

CABLE TIE (a) UNIVERSAL CABLE CLAMP (b) (c)

for 2 Braided or 1/4” cables332-202/65

for 4 Braided or 1/4”cables332-202/66

Cable tie(223-009/25)(a)

indoor

External back cable tieD = 74 to 140 mm 223-009/27 (a)D = 26 to 62 mm 223-009/25 (b)



3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.4.1 Recommended clamp spacing for Braided coaxial cable
Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA StandardRS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna SupportingStructures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, WindLoading).

Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps areattached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions.

Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximumclamp spacing are the following:

– Tower height 45m

– 1/2” radial ice

– Clamps properly installed and tightened

Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING forBraided COAXIAL CABLE type CNT 300FR (Andrew) and ICN48 (INTERCOND) is 0.5m (wind load is 240 km/h)

3.5.4.2 Recommended clamp spacing for 1/4” coaxial cable

Clamp spacing recommendation is based on the guidelines stated in EIA StandardRS-222 (Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna SupportingStructures) and BSI CP3 (Code of Basic Data for the Design of Buildings, WindLoading).

Geographical location, as well as height of tower/must, to which the clamps areattached, may have a significant impact on installation conditions.

Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the assumptions made to define the maximumclamp spacing are the following:

– Tower height 45m

– 1/2lh radial ice

– Clamps properly installed and tightened

Based on the above conditions, the recommended MAXIMUM CLAMP SPACING for1/4” COAXIAL CABLE type LDF1RN-50 (Andrew) and CF 1/4lr CuH (RFS) is:

0.8m (Wind Load 200 Km/h) or 0.5m (Wind Load 240 Km/h).

3-86SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.5 Braided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
Fig. 3.70 IBraided or 1/4” coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side

TO GROUNDING BAR ETSI (19”) RACK

“OSM/N” coaxial tail(L.=1 Mt.)

(314-327/91)


(b)to odu

section

Coaxial N-plug

Coaxial cablefixing bracket(232-124/20)

(c)

“OSM/N” coaxial tail(L.=1 Mt.)

(314-327/91)(b)

to idusection

(a) For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.6. while for P/N of 1/4” coaxial cable see PAR. 3.5.7.(b This material is included in the base connection elements (2+0 with ADM) 597-525/90.(c) This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element 597-525/90.

Ground cableye-gr 6 mm2 (314-304/51)

(c)

(a)

(a)



3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.6 Braided coaxial cable Andrew and Intercond sets
a) = The ANDREW and INTERCOND material sets are alternative to each other

b) = Commercial reference code

c) = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 190 mt

d) = Q.ty 1 for each IDU/ODU connection

Tab. 3.37 ANDREW set (a)

P/N Description Unit Q.ty

104-009/50 314-331/88 (b)

Braided CNT300 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE Mt. (c)

597-525/78A 597-525/78 (b)

Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES Nr. (d)

421-025/38 COAX N-PLUG 1421-008/35 90° COAX N-PLUG 1333-031/21 GROUNDING KIT 1

Tab. 3.38 INTERCOND set (a)

P(N Description Unit Q.ty

104-009/51 314-331/88 (b)

CF 3/10l3 ICN48 - 50 Ohm COAXIAL CABLE Mt. (c)

597-525/78B 597-525/78 (b)

Braided COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES Nr. (d)

421-025/39 COAX N-PLUG 1421-008/36 90° COAX N-PLUG 1333-031/22 GROUNDING KIT 1

3-88SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


3 - INSTALLATION

3.5.7 1/4” coaxial cable Andrew set
Tab. 3.39 Andrew set

• The above listed quantities are relevant to one IDU/ODU connection• NOTE 1 = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 300 m• NOTE 2 = N°1 Grounding Kit is standard solution for a 1/4”coaxial cable typical

path ≤50m, the use of additional Grounding Kits has to be evaluated according tothe path type.

a) = COMMERCIAL REFERENCE CODE

P/N Description Unit Q.ty

104-009/42(314-327/79)(a)

1/4” LDF1RN - 50 ohm COAXIAL CABLE Mt. NOTE 1

597-523/94A(597-523/94(a)*

1/4” COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES Nr. 1

421-008/88 STRAIGHT “N” type COAX N-PLUG 1421-008/84 90° “N” type COAX N-PLUG 1333-031/19 GROUNDING KIT 1



3 - INSTALLATION


BLANK PAGE

3-90SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


4 - ACTIVATION


4 ACTIVATION

4.1 PRESETTINGS

In this paragraph instructions are given to check and, if required, to carry out thepresettings relevant to the system type where the equipment is utilized.There are two presetting types:

– Hardware settings, performed through jumpers or connections

– Software settings, carried out through PC with dedicated software. With regard tothe system software setting options refer to the “Guide to the use of the controlsoftware", in the Operator Manual (OMN).

4.1.1 Hardware settingsIn the equipment there are no hardware settings.

4.1.2 System E2PROMThe IDU contains two different system EEPROMs to store all the NE configurations:

– internal EEPROM in the Controller unit

– external EEPROM (KEY), inserted in the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit.

In the key in the factory have been stored the Serial Number (S/N) and the licence type.

4.2 ACTIVATIONThis paragraph includes the procedures for checkings that can be carried out during theinstallation while activating the equipment.

Fig. 6.7 and Fig. 6.8 show the connectors and the control elements, located on theequipment front panel.



4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.1 Local checks
All the units comprising the equipment are tested and adjusted at the factory in order tooptimize the characteristics: usually, checks on these unit are not required whileinstalled.

Therefore, the procedures here below described have to be utilized only in case ofproblems arising in the system, due to equipment malfunction.

The checks are:

– make sure the equipment is correctly equipped as per indications in the par. 2.3 –"EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

– check the connection cables (or cable) between the indoor assembly and theoutdoor assemblies (or assembly) are connected and IF connection have beenmade as per indications in the par. 2.3 – "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

– check the equipment is connected to the primary supply voltage as described in thepar. 2.3 – "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".

4.2.2 IDU first installation– Insert the KEY into the right connector on the Alarms Restitution unit.

– Switch ON the IDU by turning the switch situated on the front cover of the AlarmsRestitution unit.

– At this point the Controller reads the S/N and the type of license of the KEY andstores it internally.

– The LCT shall now be able to complete the equipment configuration. (Based on thetype of license memorised a basic default configuration will be memorised on theKEY).

– When configuring the equipment through the LCT, the configuration will beautomatically memorised both on the Controller unit and on the KEY.

The KEY must always be inserted during regular equipment configuration. Shouldit be removed, the "No setting mode" alarm will be activated (and the red"CRITICALMAJOR" LED will light up on the Controller unit) thereby not allowingto modify the equipment configuration through the LCT.

If a KEY other than that used during the first installation is inserted while theequipment is ON, the Controller compares the S/N and the type of licensememorised (and that corresponds to the first installation KEY) with that of theKEY inserted. A data misalignment is detected and the "No setting mode" alarmis activated which will prevent modifying the configuration through the LCT.

Check by the LCT that the output power of the Modulator is +5 dBm.

4-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


4 - ACTIVATION

The following are the alarms associated to the KEY:
Fig. 4.1 IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit)

Tab. 4.1 KEY alarms

Alarm Description LCT alarm

Key missing or key mismatch

Physically missing or data memorised on the key differ from those memorised on the IDU

"No setting mode" alarm activated

Key Fault Non recoverable data failure "Key fault" alarm activated

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key ON OF

TEST

MN/W

C/MJ∆

Unita’CONTROLLORE

Unita’RESTITUTOREALLRMI

Unita’FAN

KEY

ALARM BB/MODEM #1RESTITUTION Unit

Unit

CONTROLLER BB/MODEM #2Unit Unit

ALARMRESTITUTION

unit

CONTROLLERunit

FANunit



4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.3 Alignment
To make easy the aiming operation, the ODU is equipped with a BNC connector thatmakes available the AGC voltage as function of the received field.

Fig. 4.2 ODU (AP) connection for the measurement of the received field

Fig. 4.3 ODU (AP/CC) connection for the measurement of the received field

It is necessary to execute the alignment of the antennas to ensure the correctoperation of the equipment and to make reliable the radio link to the remoteterminal.For the procedures of adjustment and aiming of the antennas, refer to thedocumentation annexed to the antennas themselves.

The VAGC range is between -3,4 V and 1,2 V (typical values) for PRX valuesbetween -30 dBm and -75 dBm, according to a linear law with rate of about 0,5 Vfor 10 dB.

Per uso interno

Connettore BNC per misura del campo Rx

Per uso interno

Connettore BNC per misura del campo Rx

Per uso interno

4-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4 Checks on equipment
4.2.4.1 List of checks

• Control of the system configuration• Configuration of IP address• PTx and PRx• Switching test for 1+1 systems• Background BER• Final checks• Restore of the operating conditions

4.2.4.2 Control of the system configuration

Control, by means of the supplied SW (LCT), that the system configuration is accordingto what required for the connection in object. In particular, it is necessary to set on bothterminals the configuration (see Tab. 2.7 “System Type” in par. 2.1.2), the operatingfrequency and the ATPC enabling, according to what foreseen by the specificationsrelated to the interested link.Eventually, configure the equipment according to what specified in “Guide to use of thecontrol software”, in the Operator Manual (OMN).

4.2.4.3 Configuration of IP address

On the first installation, the IDU has a default IP address (192.168.255.3) and then theuser can access the NE, set the network IP address and build the map containing theIP address itself. For this purpose, refer to the guide to use of the management program,of the OMN manual.If the network planning was not available, it is necessary to insert, in the two terminals,addresses belonging to two different IP subnetwork (site A = 100.100.100.6; site B =150.150.150.6), Netmask 255.255.255.0, to be able to control both the NetworkElements

4.2.4.4 Received and Transmitted Power

By means of “Measurement --> Unit” menu of the supplied SW (LCT), it is possible tocheck the levels of received and transmitted power (refer to the guide to use of themanagement program, of OMN manual).

4.2.4.5 Switching test

In presence of protected configurations (1+1 Frequency Diversity or 1+1 Hot Standby),proceed to the verification of the switching functionality.With the aid of a SDH frame analyzer, connected to the tributary access points, checkthat, after the different switching operations, the service stays active.

For a correct execution of the switching operations, refer to the guide of use ofthe management program, in OMN manual.



4 - ACTIVATION

4.2.4.6 Background BER
Check that the connection is active and operating (no alarm, payload transit); for thispurpose, a SDH frame analyzer can be connected to the tributary access points or,alternatively, it is possible to monitor the connection quality by means of the“Performance Monitoring” functionality provided by the software for equipmentmanagement (refer to the Operator Manual - OMN).In this way, check that the qualitative parameters of the connection are in compliance tothe project specification.

4.2.4.7 Final checks

After all the local verifications and the alignment operation have been executed, checkthat the levels of the received power in both the terminals are in compliance to theproject specification.

4.2.4.8 Restore of the operating conditions

Once the checks on the connection have been executed, restore the operatingconditions of the system (removing the possible manual forcing).

4-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


4 - ACTIVATION


4.3 LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIESThe accessories required for carrying out check measurements, repairs and partsreplacements of equipment the SRA 4 system consists of, are delivered for each stationwhere the equipment itself is installed.

This paragraph contains useful indications for the correct use and for the identificationof the accessories that are grouped under the P/N 597-524/95.

4.3.1 List and use of accessoriesSee Tab. 4.2.

Tab. 4.2 Station accessories

Denomination Code Q.ty UseScredriver for screws 4,5x80 323-502/01 1 It is used for the fixing subrack to the rackScredriver for3x60 Phillips screws

323-502/11 1 It is used for the assembling and disassembling of the mechanical parts

Dynamometric key 323-500/99 1 It is used for the SMA connectors tighteningExagonal head screw 3 x 8Elastic washer 3Exagonal head screw 3 x 12Exagonal nut 3

204-371/07D207-501/07D204-371/09D206-701/05D

4844

It is used to tighten to transition to the w/g section and to the RT

Cable, connection, 9 contacts female/male (L = 2.6 m)

314-101/76 1 It is used for connecting the PC to IDU



4 - ACTIVATION


4.4 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS

4.4.1 Normal operating conditionsNormal operating conditions of the equipment are indicated as follows:

– All red LEDs on the front panel of the units: OFF

– RF output power and RF input power at nominal values.

The normal operating conditions of the front panel LEDs are shown in Fig. 4.4, Fig. 4.5,Fig. 4.6 and Fig. 4.7.

4.4.2 Alarm conditionsAn alarm condition indicates a failure in the outdoor or indoor unit.

An alarm condition in the equipment is indicated by the switching on of a red LED on thefront panel of the failed unit.

The alarms are also processed and managed by the Controller unit. The LCT,connected to the Controller unit, allows an easy location of the failed unit.

Fig. 4.4 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA4 IDU)

IFCABLE

STM-n #1

PS

WSTV11 G703 Exp. Port

CO-CHANNEL

I Out

ODU PWR

STM-n #2I Out

OutI

Out

USER

CHA CHBI Out

ON OFF

∆ ‘

IFCABLE

STM-n #1

PS


CO-CHANNEL

I

ODU PWR

STM-n #2I Out

OutI

USER

CHA CHBI Out

ON OFF

∆ ‘

ODU ALM CABLE ALM

ODU ALM CABLE ALM

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key ON OF

TEST

MN/W

C/MJ∆

Unita’CONTROLLORE

Unita’RESTITUTOREALLRMI

Unita’FAN

GREEN ONSee Tab. 6.1OFF See Tab. 6.1

GREENON

OFF

OFF

4-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)

Fig. 4.6 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA4 IDU)

GREEN ONSee Tab. 6.1

OFF See Tab. 6.1

GREENON

OFF

OFF

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

“H-pol.”IDU

“V-pol.”IDU

CH. 1

CH. 2

E-link

GREEN ONSee Tab. 6.1 See Tab. 6.1 OFFGREEN

ON OFF OFF

Co-Channelcoax cables

CH. 1

CH. 2



4 - ACTIVATION

Fig. 4.7 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)
Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDUEXT

STBY

IDUMAIN

CH. 1

CH. 2

E-link B-link

CH. 3

GREEN ONSee Tab. 6.1OFF See Tab. 6.1 OFFGREEN

ON OFF

4-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE


5 MAINTENANCE

5.1 TROUBLESHOOTIN614-041/17G AND RESTORINGThis paragraph instructs about troubleshooting to be carried out on the equipment.

The malfunctions are pointed out by LEDs on the equipment, on the indoor assemblyfront panel (see Fig. 5.1, Fig. 5.2 and Fig. 5.3).

The indications function on the front panel is described in the par. 6.3 – "LED,MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES".

The sequence of the recommended actions to locate a faulty part of the equipment, toreplace it and to restore the service, are schematized in Fig. 5.5.

5.1.1 TroubleshootingThe failed unit is located by using the LCT: refer to the document "Guide to the use ofthe control software", which is part of the Operator Manual (OMN).

Fig. 5.1 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU)

IFCABLE

STM-n #1

PS


CO-CHANNEL

I Out

ODU PWR

STM-n #2I Out

OutI

Out

USER

CHA CHBI Out

ON OFF

∆ ‘

IFCABLE

STM-n #1

PS


CO-CHANNEL

I

ODU PWR

STM-n #2I Out

OutI

USER

CHA CHBI Out

ON OFF

∆ ‘

ODU ALM CABLE ALM

ODU ALM CABLE ALM

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

Key ON OF

TEST

MN/W

C/MJ∆

Unita’CONTROLLORE

Unita’RESTITUTORE

ALLRMI

Unita’FAN

TEST

C/MJ

MN/W



5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.2 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
Fig. 5.3 LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA4 IDU)

TEST

C/MJ

MN/W

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

IDUEXT

STBY

IDUMAIN

CH. 1

CH. 2

E-link B-link

CH. 3

TEST

C/MJ

MN/W

5-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2 Replacement procedures
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement.

Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, andtherefore the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting.

Note: IDU front panel LEDs gives fault status general information; in case of a moredeep investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT isnecessary.

5.1.2.1 ODU replacement

1. Power down the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit inthe IDU) (ODU PWR OFF).

2. Replace the ODU.

3. Power up the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in theIDU) (ODU PWR ON).

4. Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms)

5.1.2.2 IDU-ODU cable replacement

1. Turn the ODU off by the switch on the front panel of the BB+MODEM unit (ODUPWR OFF).

2. Disconnect the fault IDO-ODU connection cable.

3. Connect a new IDU-ODU cable.

4. Turn the ODU on (ODU PWR ON).

5. Verifies that the LEDs on the BB+MODEM unit are in the normal operatingconditions.

6. Otherwise, see Troubleshooting through LCT (OMN manual).

5.1.2.3 IDU unit replacement

5.1.2.3.1 BB+MODEM unit

BB/modem unit 1 in STI systems

1. Change the system type:• Should the current system type be 1+1 FD STI, change to 1+1 FD DTI• Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY STI, change to 1+1 HSBY DTI.

2. Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 2 andthen set immediately the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch tochannel 2.

3. Switch off ODU 1, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of theBB/modem unit 1, and extract the BB/modem unit 1.



5 - MAINTENANCE

4. Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and
connect again all the cables, except the STM-1 cables.

5. Switch on ODU 1, wait the on-line state of the BB/modem unit 1 and the completionof the cable compensation procedure.

6. Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.

7. Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2signal in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 1 andthen force immediately the Tributary switch on channel 1.

8. Change the system type:• Should the current system type be 1+1 FD DTI, change to 1+1 FD STI• Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY DTI, change to 1+1 HSBY STI.

BB/modem unit 2 in STI systems or BB/modem unit 1 and 2 in DTI systems

1. Set the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 1 (shouldunit 2 be replaced) or to channel 2 (should unit 1 be replaced).

2. Switch off the ODU, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of theBB/modem unit, and extract the BB/modem unit.

3. Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) andconnect again all the cables.

4. Switch on the ODU, wait the completion of the on-line and cable compensationprocedures.

5. Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.

5.1.2.3.2 Controller unit

1. Remove the front panel of the unit by unscrewing the 2 screws on the sides.

2. Remove the faulty unit by using the two levers on the sides.

3. Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration that has beenmemorised on the KEY will be automatically entered on the new Controller unit.

The procedure does not protect the service channels.

5-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.3 Alarm Restitution Unit
The Alarm Restitution unit replacement must be carried out after a proper proceduredriven by a LCT command. In fact its bare removal causes the System switching off,since the unit holds the power switch.

A bypass switch within the BB/Modem unit allows the powering of the whole equipment.

This switch is available in the BB/Modem unit with P/N 612-314/07 for the electricalversion and P/N 612-314/06 for the optical version. An FPGA register allows theController to recognize if this feature is supported by the BB/Modem unit.

This feature is available starting from SVR 4.5. It provides an activation command toforce the bypass switch and an automatic switch off command 3 minutes later. This timeis long enough to replace the failed Alarm Restitution unit and avoids dangerousoverheating (fans are supplied only by Alarm Restitution unit).

Hardware details are shown in Fig. 5.4. An OptoMOS relay (normally open) placed inthe BB/Modem unit acts as an electronic switch: a command coming from the ControllerUnit causes the by-pass of the mechanical switch housed in the Alarm Restitution unit.A current sensor makes the actual command status available to the FPGA for reportingto the Controller.

Fig. 5.4 Alarm Restitution unit replacement management

1. Connect the LCT to the equipment.

2. To replace the Alarm Restitution Unit without the switching off of the radio system,follow the procedure explained in the SRA 4 OMN Manual para. 6.7.1.6(Maintenance).

Replacement procedure:

BB/MODEM Unit Controller UnitAlarm

RestitutionUnit

voltagesTertiary

Power switch

Check and status

Command

New BB board indicator

DC/DCConverter

DC/DC12 V



5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1.2.3.4 Fans unit
1. Push up-side the switch on the front panel (in position OPEN).

2. Remove the unit by using the handle on the front panel.

Fig. 5.5 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure

5-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE


5.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTSThe chosen maintenance philosophy anticipates substitution of an outdoor assembley(ODU) or a failed unit (baseband section - IDU). Therefore all spares consist of outdoorassembly and units that are equal to the ones used in the equipment itself.

In the baseband section, a spare unit substitutes the corresponding failed unitcompletely.

5.2.1 IDU spare parts list

5.2.2 ODU spare parts listEvery ODU has been adjusted in factory at the RF channel frequency. Refer topar. 2.2.7 to see the complete list of the available ODU .

5.2.2.1 AP ODU

Tab. 5.1 List of spare parts - IDU

Denomination P/N

SRA4 IDUBB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)orBB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)

612-314/07

612-314/06

SRA4 IDU-STM1

BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)orBB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)

612-314/65

612-314/64

Controller unit 634-001/02Alarm Restitution unit 614-104/66Fan unit 614-041/17Wired subrack 628-587/10Cover 224-065/54

Tab. 5.2 7 GHz

ODU P/N

735-201/07-xxx

Tab. 5.3 8 GHz

ODU P/N



5 - MAINTENANCE


5.2.2.2 AP/CC ODU

735-201/08-xxx

Tab. 5.4 10 GHz

ODU P/N

735-201/10-xxx

Tab. 5.5 11 GHz

ODU P/N

735-201/11-xxx

Tab. 5.6 13 GHz

ODU P/N

735-201/13-xxx

Tab. 5.7 6 GHz (6L)

ODU P/N735-211/06-xxx

Tab. 5.8 6 GHz (6U)

ODU P/N735-211/06-xxx

Tab. 5.9 7 GHz

ODU P/N735-211/07-xxx

Tab. 5.10 8 GHz

ODU P/N735-211/08-xxx

Tab. 5.3 8 GHz

5-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE


Note - The ODUs can be used also as spare parts of the previous ODUs according tothe following table:

Tab. 5.11 11 GHz

ODU P/N735-211/11-xxx

ODU P/N as Spare part also of the ODU

735-211/11-110 735-211/11-100735-211/11-111 735-211/11-101735-211/11-160 735-211/11-150735-211/11-161 735-211/11-151735-211/11-210 735-211/11-200735-211/11-211 735-211/11-211735-211/11-260 735-211/11-250735-211/11-261 735-211/11-251735-211/11-310 735-211/11-300735-211/11-311 735-211/11-301735-211/11-360 735-211/11-350735-211/11-361 735-211/11-351

Tab. 5.12 13 GHz

ODU P/N735-211/13-xxx



5 - MAINTENANCE


5.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USEThis paragraph illustrates the procedure to use when having to replace the faulty unit ofthe IDU and the faulty ODU.

To simplify the description, the following procedures concern the disassembling of theparts to replace. Obviously to place the spare part back proceed in the opposite manner.

5.3.1 Procedure for the IDU unit replacementRefer to par. 5.1.2.3 – "IDU unit replacement".

5.3.2 Procedure for the ODU replacement To replace the ODU remove the ODU from the supporting framework fastened to themast.

The procedure to follow is specified below (refer to Fig. 5.6):

a) Switch off the ODU by using the switch on the relevant BB/Modem unit (ODU PWROFF) in the IDU.

b) Pull out the IF cable.

c) Disconnect ground.

d) Disconnect the RF waveguide.

e) Loosen and remove the four bottom screws (S1-S4).Lift the ODU, so as to free it from the hooks on the support, and remove it.

5-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


5 - MAINTENANCE

Fig. 5.6 ODU Disconnection
TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW



5 - MAINTENANCE


BLANK PAGE

5-12SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


6 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION


6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

6.1 ODU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

6.1.1 General descriptionThe IF signals, coming/sent from/to the IDU, are properly treated in the IF subunit. Herea primary lightning protection and the DC extraction are performed. A diplexer sends theIF signals to the IF sections and the FSK subcarrier to the modem unit.

The power supply returns to the IF subunit the required voltages to be distributed to theother utilizers.

The Rx IF (140 MHz), coming from the microwave receiver, is addressed to the IDUwhile the Tx IF (350 MHz), coming from the IDU, is sent to the transceiver together a DCvoltage: the presence of the DC voltage enables the transmitter to operate at fixed gain(AGC OFF).

The IF unit houses the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuits, a frequency referenceoscillator (TCXO) and a single chip microprocessor controller to manage the hardwareinside the ODU.

The dual VCO subunit provides a very low phase noise UHF signals to synchronize theRF VCOs.

The transceiver interfaces the filter diplexer which insures the required decouplingbetween transmitter and receiver modules.

The outdoor unit (ODU), shown in Fig. 6.1, is a cabinet containing:

the RF parts,

– Microwave Diplexer Filter

– Dual UHF VCO subunit

– Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF)

and a power supply distributor containig the outdoor side of a FSK modulatedcommunication channel for IDU-ODU signalling:

– IF unit with FSK subunit

– Power supply




Fig. 6.1 Outdoor unit
(5)

(3)

RFAMPLIFIER

RFRICEIVER

(4)

RFVCO

SYNTUHF

RFVCO

(2)

FSKSUBUNIT

IF CABLE

(1)

350 MHz 140 MHz

-VB

+12V+6.5V

+25V

VCO

TCXO

RF GROUP COMPOSITION

1) Power supply2) IF unit3) MWTF4) Dual UHF VCO5) Filter duplexer

6-2SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



6.1.2 Main characteristics
The ODU supports continous linear ATPC.

The ODU has the following external connections:

– AGC voltage measurement on a BNC connector

– IF Connection for IDU-ODU cable connection (connector type N)

– Waveguide flange for connection to antenna

– An RS-232 interface accessible from outside the ODU is provided for theconnection with a PC during tests, factory tuning and for Inventory (7C LEMOConnector)

– IF LO and RF LO connectors for the CC configuration.

6.1.3 Unit description

6.1.3.1 Power supply

Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm forfailures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and insures the primary lightningprotection.

The ODU must withstand holes in the Power Supply Voltage coming from IDU up to 6msec.

A surge protector is also mounted on this unit to prevent any damage that can occur dueto lightning discharge (5KV protection according to I.E.C. 801-5).

6.1.3.2 IF unit

Is a transversal unit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit,IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller.

A triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSKsubcarriers toward the modem.

The Tx IF (350MHz) is up-converted to 1690MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter;the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180MHz), is down-converted to140MHz and sent to the IDU.

The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequencyreference oscillator.




6.1.3.2.1 FSK sub-unit
This subunit collects, manages and processes the informations (alarms, commands,data channels) coming / going from / to the different units into the Radio Terminal Unitin the IDU.The communication between ODU and IDU is performed by FSK mo-demodulation oftwo distinct carriers at 10 MHz (from ODU to IDU) and at 7 MHz (from IDU to ODU).This unit has also the task to distribute the secondary voltages to all the units containedin the ODU.

6.1.3.3 Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit

The subunit is composed of a transmitter section and a receiver section.The transmitter receives as input the 1690 MHz IF signal coming from the IF subunit andup converts it into a radio frequency signal by means of TX local oscillator. The signalis then amplified by the power section and transmitted to the microwave duplexer.The receiver section receives from the antenna a radio frequency signal, amplifies bymeans of a LNA and equalizes it, and then down converts it into a 2180 MHz IF signalby means of RX local oscillator. The IF signal is amplified and then transmitted to theIF subunit and then to the indoor unit (demodulator section).The two Local Oscillators (one for the transmitter section and one for the receiversection) are composed of two broadband VCOs phase locking to the UHF signalincoming from the DUAL UHF VCO.The Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF) allows to translate a multilevel QAMmodulated signal from the intermediate frequency IF to the microwave field and viceversa. MWTF operates in temperature range from -33 °C to + 55 °C.A simplified block diagram of the unit is shown in Fig. 6.2. The unit consists of atransmission up-converter (including the relevant phase lockable oscillator PLO), of areceiver down converter (including the relevant PLO) and a dc section including ALCdriver telemetry/alarm and biasing circuits.The transmitter section includes a variable gain IF preamplifier and filter, IF linearizer,up-converter (which besides converting the IF signal must reject the Image and LOsignals), a power stage an output detector. and a wave-guide isolator. The transmitter can support high complexity QAM modulation format. The transmitter always operates in closed loop. The EEPROM (previously programmed)suitable addressed, provides digital serial data to the IF PROCESSOR unit (anequipment that interface the MWTF unit trough a multipin connector). The digital dataare analog converted inside the IF PROCESSOR and then returned to the microwavetransceiver. The analog voltage is the reference for the ALC driver (Which contains adetector diode for temperature compensation) and supplied to the power control module(variable gain amplifier or variable attenuator).The receiver consists of a wave-guide isolator, an LNA, variable RF linear attenuator,an image rejection filter, a down converter-mixer and an IF stage with adjustable gain. The two PLOs (for the Tx and Rx sections) are implemented using the same circuit. Abroadband VCO is phase locked to the UHF input signal according to the circuit ofFig. 6.2. Since the phase noise close to the carrier is determined by the UHF signal andabove all because the microwave module is not mechanical isolated, the PLL filter mustbe dimensioned to have a cut-off frequency of about 10 MHz. The unit includes also five digital potentiometer with internal memory in order to set allthe parameters necessary for the best working condition (Tx, Rx linearity, RF/IF receivernominal gain).

6-4SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



Fig. 6.2 MWTF simplified block diagram
xN

VCO

: M

PLL

xN

VCO

: MPL

L

SQU

ELC

H

+5 V

T

ALC

DR

IVER

13dB

PW

Rre

duct

ion

r1

r2

t1 t

2 t3

LIN

AM/A

MAM

/PM

t1 t2 t3

r1

DIG

ITIL

POTE

NTI

OM

.(w

ith in

tern

alm

emor

y)

r2R

x AG

C

Det

. Vol

tage

Com

p. D

iode

volta

ge

J 2

RF

from

DU

PLEX

ERFI

LTER

DO

WN

CO

NVE

RTE

RU

PC

ON

VER

TER

TxAM

PLIF

IER

J 3

RF

toD

UPL

EXER

FILT

ER

IF16

90 M

Hz

IF21

80 M

Hz

From

DU

AL V

HF

VCO

To/F

rom

UN

ITA'

IFFr

om D

UAL

VH

F VC

O

+5 V

+5 V D

C S

ECTI

ON




6.1.3.4 Dual UHF VCO subunit
The subunit is composed of two UHF VCOs: their frequencies are synthesized by meansof two indipendent synthesizers placed in the IF subunit. The frequencies of the VCOsare used as reference frequencies for the Tx and Rx PLLs located in RF module.

Both the oscillators have a low phase noise active device in order to guarantee therequired noise specifications.

The relative resonant cavity is a coaxial dielectric resonator with such a Q factor in orderto achieve the required effective bandwidth varying the varactors voltage.

Then the VCO output signal is opportunely amplified.

With CC operations the two VCO subunits must be synchronized in Rx.

This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the twoODU's. Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RFfrequency to 2180 MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180MHz to 140 MHz).

With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master(generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives thesynchronisms from the ODU Master).

6.1.3.5 Microwave Duplexer filter

The Duplexer filter is composed of two band-pass microwave filters connecting the RFmodule to the antenna: in this way it is possible to use the same antenna to transmit andreceive.

The Microwave Duplexer insures the tunability in a quarter of RF band.

6.1.3.6 Tx Alarm

A loss of the RF transmitted power is detected with an alarm relayed via the FSKcommunication channel to the IDU.

6.1.3.7 ATPC option

In the equipment ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function is available.ATPC is linear and continuos.

6-6SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006




6.2 IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONThe IDU consists of 4 types of units connected together via the backplane:

– Controller unit par. 6.2.1

– Alarm Restitution unit par. 6.2.2

– Fan unit par. 6.2.3

– BB-Modem unit par. 6.2.4

Fig. 6.3 IDU Subrack

Alarms IDU

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST STM-1 #1InOut

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

IF

V11In OutWST

PS

ODU PWR

G703

CHACHBI O

D‘

In Out

CO-CHODUALM

CABLE ALM

InUn.

FAN

ODUALM

CABLE

ALM

USER

USER

STM-1 #2InOut

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

Exp. Port

Exp. Port

Out

CO-CH

Power supply + Alarms

Controller

IF + Modem + ODU Power supply

Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply



Fan

Power supply + Alarms

Controller





Fan

SRA4 IDU

SRA4 IDU-STM1




6.2.1 Controller unit
The function of the unit is of system controller and MCF. The unit configures the systemand controls the alarm system by managing the right transit and the transmission of thepayload and service streams. The following are also provided: the F Interface for theLCT, the Q interface for the supervisory system and the 4 general alarm indicating LEDsof the system.

6.2.2 Alarm Restitution UnitThe function of the unit is of restituting the system alarms managed by the Controllerunit and of making the remote-commands/remote controls of the remote stationavailable to the external source through a Sub-D connector fitted on the front panel. Italso manages the 2 fans present on the subrack and their failure. The switch used toswitch ON the equipment is fitted on the front panel together with a connector for theinsertion of the Memory Key.

6.2.3 Fan unitTwo fans are present on this unit, which constantly ventilate the IDU assembly.

6.2.4 BB-MODEM unitThe unit carries out the following operation:

– STM-1 input/output interfacing and base band processing; this interface can eitherbe of the electric or of the optical type. Base band processing is of the RSA type(Regenerator Section Adaptation); the MSA function (Multiplex SectionAdaptation) is not implemented.

– Drop/Insert of the 2 Mb/s stream as WS traffic (Way Side) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65).

– Drop/Insert of the two 64 kbit/s housekeeping channels (G703 and V11).

– Generation of a 350MHz IF modulated signal for the ODU transmitter.

– Processing and demodulation of the 140MHz IF signal incoming from the ODUreceiver.

– The IF IDU-ODU cable interface, suitable to power the ODU, suitable for IF Tx andRx connections, IDU-ODU alarms and housekeeping communications through theFSK modulated sub-carriers.

6.2.4.1 BB Section

Refer to Fig. 6.4.

The CMI (G.703) coded input signal is amplified, converted from CMI to NRZ andconverted from serial to parallel.

The data is then transmitted to the T-RSOH drop block, which will carry out the followingRSOH terminating functions:

6-8SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



– frame alignment through the searching of the A1 and A2 bytes of the STM-1 frame
– data descrambling

– calculation of the BIP-8 parity with the B1 received bytes

– check of any other alarms contained in the SOH bytes (e.g., MS-AIS. MS-RDI)

– D1, D2, D3 and D4-D12 transit transparently (they are not managed)

– E1 transits transparently (it is not managed)

– F1 is dropped if configured as 64 kbit/s AUX or transits transparently.

Therefore the signal is sent to the R-RSOH insert circuit in order to insert the new bytesof the RSOH, including the 64 kbit/s signals or the 2 Mbit/s WST one. The tributaryswitch will receive the cited signal or that coming from the other BB+MODEM unit(should the tributary be protected) and make it transit.

On the Receive side the signal coming from the Modem section enters the Hitless switchthrough one path, while on the other path enters the signal incoming from the secondBB+MODEM unit, i.e., in case of the 1+1 configuration.

Based on the alarms of the Modem section the Hitless switch extracts the best signaland hitless switches (without errors).

At the output of the hitless switch are carried out operations on the RSOH bytes that arecomplementary to those carried out on the transmission side. The signal is henceparallel-to-serial converted and then CMI encoded ready to be forwarded to the output.

Note: With regard to the 1+0 configuration, the switches are fixed and allow the transitof the signal coming from the unit proper.




Fig. 6.4 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section
6.2.4.2 Modem Section

6.2.4.2.1 Overview

The functions performed by the modulator and demodulator are here below set down:

– the pulse formation is obtained through techniques of digital signal processing(DSP). The BB filtering is realized by digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filtersand it implements a formation of raised cosine pulse with a suitable roll-off factor.At modulator side, these devices have fully programmable coefficients while, atdemodulator side, the Rx filters have been designed with fixed coefficient structure.The two post-modulation and post-demodulation filters are of analog andanti-aliasing type.

– As the number of modulation states increases, the radio systems become morevulnerable to multipath fading.The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) represents a powerful solution whichshows a better performance vs. complexity ratio, together with a lower sensitivityto timing phase.High performances are assured by dinamic convergence, accomplished by meansof a modified minimum mean-square error (MMSE) algorithm exhibiting "blind"converegence acquisition, combined with the recursive updating of tapcoefficients.

T-RSOHdrop

LOS, LOF, J0(TIM),B1, PM, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, DCC-R mng

R-RSOHinsert

B1 regeneration,Insertion of : J0,WS, DCC-R

AUX channels

ATPC insert

Clock 155

P2S

¸ 8

From other MOD

TRIBswitch

FSK processingCPU

16 MB SDRAM2x4 MB FLASH2 MB EEPROM

BYTE_IN

From its own local DEM

SWITCHhitless

T-RSOHinsert

LOF, J0 (TIM), B1,PM, DCC-R mng

R-RSOHdrop

AUX channels

From prot DEM

ATPC drop

Clock 155

¸ 8

P2S

Main / Prot

S2P

S2PSTM-1

STM-1 To MOD

To MOD

CMI

STM-1

STM-1

BYTE_OUT

(*)

(*)

(*) not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65

6-10SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



– The TCM coding utilization for the error correction allows the spectral net
requested spectral efficiency is easily met by adopting a non-critical roll-off factor.A 2 or 4-dimension trellis coding associated with an M-QAM crossed format hasbeen adopted as the more effective solution as far as the transmission efficacy isconcerned as well as of total performances.

– A maximum likelihood decoding procedure applies to the received sequence of2D/4D points by means of a Viterbi algorithm. In case of 4D costellation as a preliminary step, the decoder detects the received4D point; it divides it into a pair of 2D points and the closest point in each 4D subsetand its metrics ("Euclidean distance" between the two points) are evaluated on thebasis the 2D points and metric estimation.The foregoing process can iteratively evaluate all the points in eachmultidimensional subset. By means of the Viterbi decoder the most probabletransmitted sequence of subsets is then estimated.The process implies a slight complexity increase but operates at half the speed(considering two successive symbols at the same time).

– The errors detected by the decoder allow two BER alarm thresholds to be provided(FAST BER), to activate the Early Warning switching by means of the integratedhitless protection system.




6.2.4.2.2 Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the
BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65)

The XPIC is automatically enabled in co-channel configuration.

Co-channel operation with high level modulation schemes requires very highcross-polarization descrimination (XPD). Modern radio relay antennas meet the XPDrequirements at least under ideal propagation conditions; neverthelesscross-polarization interference (XPI) between orthogonally arranged channels mayincrease under particular conditions such as rainfall or multipath propagation.

As additional mean to counteract these phenomena, a powerful cross-polarizationinterference canceller devices has been fit into the demodulator. Since the interferenceeffects are time variable, the XPIC device structure (shown in Fig. 6.5) is adaptive,consisting also of transversal filter.

At transmit side, it is not requested neither the common use for the V and H channels ofa single L.O. nor the synchronization of the two used oscillators.

There is also no strict requirement for clock synchronization at transmit side.

At receive side, beside the exchange of the received data signals at IF level, the onlyinterconnection between vertical and horizontal channel is the L.O. synchronization ofthe receivers and no additional clock synchronization of the demodulators is necessary.Another advantage of this concept is the independence of the XPIC operation from thelock-in state of the carrier recovery being the carrier frequencies of the interfering signaland the compensation signal identical at the adder point. This greatly improvesperformances after strong XPI events since the XPIC can first remove the XPI on themain signal, thus facilitating the subsequent lock-in procedure.

Fig. 6.5 XPIC Concept

6-12SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



6.2.4.2.3 Block diagram
Refer to Fig. 6.6.

The interface with the BB section is at byte level, the IF one is at 350 MHz on the uplinkand 140 MHz on the downlink. The modem implements a TCM encoding linked to aReed Solomon. A bit interleaver protects the pointer and reduces pointer slip. A byteinterleaver distributes the error burst generated by the TCM decoder in order toguarantee and efficient linked code. Sampling is asynchronous both on the transmissionside and on the receive side and it always takes place at 200 MHz. This latter frequencyis obtained through a quartz-crystal oscillator. A variable interpolator matches thesymbol frequency to the sampling frequency. The transmission carrier is obtained fromanother 350 MHz quartz-crystal oscillator. On the receive side instead, the 140 MHz IFis directly sampled hence a direct modulation is obtained.

The two IF signals are combined through a splitter, which guarantees the requiredisolation between the two paths. Over the same coaxial cable is established thedialogue (alarm and control signal) between the Outdoor Section and the Indoor Sectionthrough two further FSK modulated sub-carriers whose frequencies are respectively 10MHz for the Outdoor signal and 7 MHz for the Indoor signal.

The Modem section also operates as a collector of the data to send to the Controller. Infact, through the data bus the Controller receives the information concerning failures onthe outdoor unit (ODU) or on the cable interconnecting the ODU and Modem.

According to a software setting the modulation scheme can be 128 TCM-4D or32 TCM-2D.




Fig. 6.6 Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section
IFX IN

IFX OUT

BBPROC

BYTE_IN

CK_IN

BYTE_OUT

CK_OUT

PLL RX byte(19.44 / 38.88)

I

QDAC

200 MHz clock XO

:2

:1

p/2

TRIPIF 350 MHz (Tx)

140 MHz (Rx)

FSKMODEM

7 MHz (Tx)

10 MHz (Rx)

ADC

ADC

peak(from BB proc.)

offset(from BB proc.)

350 MHz clock XO

6-14SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006




6.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHESIn this paragraph are reported the operations of all the control and command elementsthat are present on the front panels of the units making up the equipment.

Fig. 6.7 illustrates the front panel of the indoor assembly showing the LEDs, themonitoring points, the connectors and the control elements.

The list and the function of the LEDs are reported in Tab. 6.1.

Fig. 6.7 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

In the N+1 configuration some connectors are not used. The not used connectorsare shown in Fig. 3.51.

1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels :(byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11)(In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only)

2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic4 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic5 - SMA connector for ODU connection6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)7 - LED8 - Connector for the KEY9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)11 - Bipolar connector for station battery12 - Not used13 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST

PS

Exp. Port

CO-CHODU PWR

G703USER

CHACHB CABLEALM I O

‘In OutU

n.

FAN

STM-1 #1 STM-1 #2In Out In OutIn Out

ODU

ALM

Key

1 4 3 3 7 1172

9 10 568 7 7 7 12 12

121213




Fig. 6.8 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

2 - SubD-9 RS-232 connector for LCT link3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic4 - 1-0/2.3 Coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic5 - SMA connector for ODU connection6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)7 - LED8 - Connector for the KEY9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)11 - Bipolar connector for the station battery12 - Not used13 - RJ45 connector for the supervisory Q interface

Alarms IDU PWR

Q-lan E-Link LCT

KeyI O

IF

V11In Out

WST

PS

Exp. Port

CO-CHODU PWR

G703USER

CHACHB ODU ALM

CABLE ALM I O

D‘In OutU

n.

FAN

STM-1 #1InOut

STM-1 #2InOut

1 4 3 3 7 1172

9 10 568 7 7 7 12 12

121213

6-16SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



Fig. 6.9 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic4 - SMA connector for ODU connection5 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)6 - LED7 - Connector for the KEY8 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control9 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)10 - Bipolar connector for station battery11 - Not used12 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface

1 3 6 1062

8 9 457 6 6

1112




Fig. 6.10 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic4 - SMA connector for ODU connection5 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)6 - LED7 - Connector for the KEY8 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control9 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)10 - Bipolar connector for station battery11 - Not used12 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface

1 3 6 1062

8 9 457 6 6

1112

6-18SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006




Note 1: This LED displays the position of the Rx switch.Note 2: In the N+1 configuration this LED is always OFF on the Standby BB-Modem

unit.Note 3: In N+1 configuration on the BB-Modem units relevant to the protected channels

LED CH. A and CH. B have the following meaning:– CH.A ON, CH. B OFF: working channel– CH. A OFF, CH. B ON: channel on standby.

Tab. 6.1 Summary of the front panel LEDs

Unit LED Colour Meaning

BB+MODEMUnit

(Note 3)

ODUAlarm

Red General ODU alarm: The alarm is dropped at Base-Band level. It lights up when an alarm is present on the ODU or the ODU is disconnected.

CABLE Alarm

Yellow CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is lower than expected. The causes might be due to the cable either breaking down or being disconnected, or to absence of ODU.

Red CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is higher than expected. The cause might be due to a short-circuit on the cable or on the ODU.

CH A(Note 1, 2)

Green Channel 1 currently used; the unit is currently operating by using channel 1 (Refer to Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12).

Yellow Channel 1 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.11 and Fig. 6.12).

CH B(Note 1, 2)

Green Channel 2 currently used; the unit is currently operating by using channel 2 (Refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14).

Yellow Channel 2 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14).

∆' Red General unit alarm: the LED is ON if the battery cable is disconnected.

Green Power Supply Status: the LED is ON in case of normal operating condition.

CONTROLLERUnit

∆' Red General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm.

TEST Yellow Unusual alarm: The LED lights up when the equipment is not operating according to what configured, but is "forced" into an unusual condition.

CRITICAL/ MAJOR

Red Critical/ Major alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a Critical/Major" alarm inside the IDU, for which an immediate (Critical) or urgent (Major) corrective action is required.

MINOR / WARNING

Red Minor/ Warning alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a "Minor/Warning" alarm inside the IDU, for which a corrective action is not urgently required.




Fig. 6.11 LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection
SwitchTxTx1

Tx2 Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

SwitchRx Ch.A

Ch.B



ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703 Data Interface


T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

STM-1

SDH Interface

Data Interface

electrical/optical

SDH Interface

fixed

SwitchTx

Tx1Tx2

fixed

SwitchRx

Ch.A

Ch.B

not used

STM-1

6-20SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



Fig. 6.12 LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU



ODU

Demodulator

ODU


BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703


T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

electrical/opticalSTM-1


Data Interface

SDH Interface

Data Interface


electrical/optical

STM-1

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

SwitchTxTx1

Tx2

SwitchRx Ch.A

Ch.B

SwitchTx

Tx1Tx2

SwitchRx

Ch.ACh.B




Fig. 6.13 LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection
SwitchTxTx1

Tx2 Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

SwitchRx Ch.A

Ch.B



ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2



T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

STM-1

SDH Interface

Data Interface

electrical/optical

SDH Interface

fixed

SwitchTx

Tx1Tx2

fixed

SwitchRx

Ch.A

Ch.B

not used

STM-1

SwitchTxTx1

Tx2 Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

SwitchRx Ch.A

Ch.B



ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2



T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

STM-1

SDH Interface

Data Interface


SDH Interface

SwitchTx

Tx1Tx2

SwitchRx

Ch.A

Ch.B

not used

fixed

fixed

6-22SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006



Fig. 6.14 LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA4 IDU only)
SwitchTxTx1

Tx2 Modulator


ODU

Demodulator

ODU

SwitchRx Ch.A

Ch.B



ODU

Demodulator

ODU

T-RSOH L-RSOH

1+1BASE BAND

INTERCONNECTION

BB UNIT 1

BB UNIT 2



T-RSOH L-RSOH

64 kbit/s V.11/G.703

STM-1

SDH Interface

Data Interface

electrical/optical

STM-1

SDH Interface

SwitchTx

Tx1Tx2

SwitchRx

Ch.A

Ch.B

not used

fixed

fixed

electrical/optical

STM-1

electrical/optical

STM-1





BLANK PAGE

6-24SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU) - UMN

911-381/02C0000 - Issue 7, March 2006


SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)SDH Split Radio

User Manual (UMN)

D.45 D.55

D.25

D.30

D.20

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio

User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006

SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio

User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006SRA 4 - 6/7/8/10/11/13 GHz (WB ODU)

SDH Split Radio

User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006

User Manual (UMN)

User Manual (UMN)

911-381/02C0000 Issue 7, March 2006



PRINTED in ITALY



sra4-umn 6-13ghz user manual ok

Documents

internal use

use license

use precautions1

38102c0000 issue

optical safety

previous issue

configuration sra4 idu

sra4 idustm1